'mm»: 


^^mK 


OMa 


'\  --  '  ■■■^'in/  irv-fc  > 

T  '•'  \r\r\' 

,■    ■  '■'-.",,  f  •  v*^>*^    ■  *> 

I     '"     ■'    V  -S  M 

bv^^^V^-^/I^A- 

-■^fs\ 

t'>a/^.>:^A:U^^;^ 

^^       ' 

\  ^^'^^A'^'A-- ■'■■■'  '■ 

■   '-    v^r  4\ 

ml^m^ 

lA.     ■^■'.^^A'^'Aiy 

?v':\.^/:-^-A 

1%**^  ■' '^c^ssOT^&yAiAi :: 


I 


t 


f 


^ 


INFANTRY  TACTICS, 


OR, 


Rules  for  the  Exercise  and  Maii(Eiiyre« 


CONFEDERATE  STATES  INFANTRY 

IN    THE 

EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE 

COMPILED,  ARRANGID,  AND  ADAPTED  TO 

HARDP:E'S  DRILL, 

BY   COL.   JNO.   H.    RICHARDSON, 
of  the  Provisional  Army  C.  S. 


RICHMOND,  VA. 

WEST  &  JOHNSTON,  145  Main  Street. 
1«62. 


Tr."r^. 


Entered,   according    to    act    of  Congress,    in  the 

year  1862,  by 

WEST  &  JOHNSTON, 

Iq  the  District  Court  of  the  Confederate  States  for  the 
Eastern  District  of  Virginia. 

MACFARLANE    «i     FER3U5S0N.    PRINTERS. 


^ 


..,f 


f 


LIGHT  INFANTRY  TACTICS. 
TITLE  V. 

EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE. 


General  principles  and  divisions  of  the  Evolutions 
of  the  Line. 

990.*  The  School  of  the  Battalion,  compre- 
hending the  principle  and  details  of  all  the 
movements  that  ought,  in  any  case,  to  be  made 
by  a  single  battalion,  it  remains  to  apply  those 
principles  to  a  line  of  many  battalions. 

991.  In  this  instruction,  a  line  of  eight  bat- 
talions, making  a  corps  d^armee  of  two  divisions 
or  four  brigades,  will  be  supposed ;  but  the  rules 
herein  prescribed  are  equally  applicable  to  a  bri- 
gade, a  division,  or  any  number  of  battalions. 

992.  The  School  of  the  Battalion  has  been 
divided  into  five  parts :  the  same  division  will 
herein  be  observed. 

993.  As  often  as  one  or  more  brigades  or  divi- 
sions, united  in  the  same  line,  manoeuvre  together, 

•  The  paragraphs  of  this  volume  are  numbered  in 
the  same  series  with  those  of  the  second  volume 
Hardee's  Tactics,  and  the  references  are  also  to  those 
works. 


45085'?' 


4  EYOLUTIONS   OF  THE    LINE. 

each  battalion  will  be  designated  by  its  number, 
according  to  its  position  in  the  line.  The  battal- 
ion on  the  right  of  the  whole  will  be  nominated 
first,  that  next  on  its  left  second,  the  next  one 
third,  and  so  regularly  on  to  the  battalion  that 
closes  the  left  of  the  line. 

Posts  of  the  General' in- Chief,  of  the  Major- Gene- 
rals and  Brigadier- Generals,  in  line  and  in 
column. 

994.  In  line  of  battle,  the  General-in-Chief 
will  have  no  fixed  position ;  he  will  go  wherever 
he  may  juige  his  presence  necessary. 

995.  In  column,  he  will  hold  himself  habitu- 
ally at  its  head,  in  order  to  direct  it  according  to 
Lis  views.  In  the  evolutions,  he  will  place  him* 
self  at  the  point  he  can  best  direct  the  general 
execution  of  the  movement.  In  all  cases  he  will 
take  care  to  leave  in  his  habitual  position  the 
next  in  command,  or  the  chief  of  his  staff,  charged 
with  the  execution  of  his  orders. 

996  In  line  of  battle,  Major- Generals,  (Gene- 
rals of  division,)  will  place  themselves  at  about 
seventy  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  divi- 
sions. In  column,  they  will  hold  themselves  on 
the  directing  flank,  abreast  with  the  centres  of 
their  divisions,  and  at  thirty  or  forty  paces  from 
the  guides. 

997.  In  line  of  battle,  Brigadier- Generalsj 
(Generals  of  brigade,)  will  place  themselves  at 


EVOLUTIONS  or  THE   LIKE.  5 

about  forty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centres  of  their 
brigades.  In  column,  at  fifteen  or  twenty  paces 
outside  of  the  guides,  and  abreast  with  the  cen- 
tres of  their  brigades. 

998.  Major  and  Brigadier-Generals  will  look  to 
the  exact  and  regular  execution  of  all  commands 
coming  from  the  General,  or  given  by  themselves; 
accordingly  they  may  throw  themselves  wherever 
they  may  judge  their  presence  necesgary  within 
the  extent  of  their  particular  commands. 

999.  The  posts  of  the  field  and  staff  of  battal- 
ions have  been  given  in  Titles  I.  and  IV.,  Har- 
dee's Tactics. 

General  rules  for  commands. 

1000.  "When  the  General  shall  wish  to  cause  a 
movement  to  be  executed,  he  will  give  the  gene- 
ral commands  relative  thereto.  Each  colonel 
will  always  successively  repeat,  with  the  greatest 
rapidity,  on  their  reaching  him,  these  general 
commands,  unless  the  General  has  given,  or  sent 
to  him,  an  order  to  the  contrary. 

1001.  The  colonels  having  repeated  the  gene- 
ral commands,  as  just  prescribed,  will  immediate- 
ly command,  and  cause  to  be  executed  without 
waiting  for  each  other,  the  preparatory  move- 
ments which,  in  their  battalions,  ought  to  precede 
the  execution  of  the  general  movement. 

1002.  The  Brigadier  and  Major-Generals  will 
look  to  the  prompt  execution  of  these  preparatory 
movemehts  in   their   brigades  and   divisions,  and 


45QS57 


0  lYOLUTlONS   OF    THE   LINE. 

rectify  any  error  that  may  be  committed  by  the 
colonels. 

1003.  The  final  command,  or  that  which  deter- 
mines the  execution  of  the  general  movement, 
■will  always  be  given  by  the  General. 
•  1004.  The  lieutenant-colonels  and  majors  will 
repeat  the  general  commands,  whether  of  caution 
or  execution,  as  often  as  the  wind  or  noise  may 
prevent  those  commands  from  being  easily  heard 
from  one  battalion  to  another. 

1005.  When,  from  any  cause,  a  colonel  shall 
not  have  heard  the  general  command,  he  will,  on 
seeing  the  battalion  next  to  his  own  executing  a 
movement,  immediately  cause  his  battalion  to  ex- 
ecute the  same  movement. 

1006.  When  a  line  has  to  execute  a  central 
movement,  the  General  will  throw  himself  to  the 
front  which  he  may  select  for  it,  and  give  or  send 
to  each  of  the  neighbouring  battalions  the  order 
relative  to  the  movement  which  each  position  of 
the  line  has  to  execute,  as  hereinafter  explained. 

1007.  In  column,  commands  will  be  extended, 
by  repetition,  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples. 

1008.  As  often  as  a  line  breaks  into  several 
columns,  the  senior  general  officer  or  colonel,  in 
each,  will  discharge  the  duties  attributed  above 
to  the  General-in-Chief. 


PART  FIRST. 

Article  T. 

To  ope7i  and  to  close  ranks. 

1009.  The  General,  wishing  to  cause  ranks  to 
be  opened,  will  command  : 

1.  Prepare  to  open  ranks. 

1010.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonels and  majors  will  conform  themselves 
to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  23  ;  the  colonels  will 
immediately  command  :  To  the  rear,  open  order. 
The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March. 

1011.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  ranks  will  be 
opened  in  conformity  to  what  is  prescribed — 
School  of  the  Battalion.  Each  battalion  will  ex- 
ecute the  movement,  as  if  it  were  isolated  ;  ac- 
cordingly it  need  not  be  attempted  to  align  the 
rear  rank  of  one  battalion  on  that  of  others. 

1012.  The  General  will  cause  ranks  to  be 
closed  by  the  command  prescribed,  School  of  the 
Battalion. 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

Article  II. 
Manual  of  arms. 

1013.  The  manual  of  arms  will  never  be  exe- 
cuted in  line. 

Article  III. 

Loading  at  icill,  and  the  firings. 

1014.  In  line,  only  loading  at  loill  will  be  exe- 
cuted. 

1015.  The  General,  wishing  to  cause  arms  to 
be  loaded,  will  command  : 

1.  Prepare  to  load. 

1016.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  General 
will  add  : 

2.  Load. 

1017.  AVhich,  immediately  repeated,  will  be 
executed  as  prescribed,   School  oj  the  Battalion. 

1018.  The  General,  wishing  to  cause  the  firings 
to  be  executed  if  the  arms  are  loaded,  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  Fire  Inj  hattalion,  (or  wing,  or  company.) 

1019.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  General 
will  add :     ^ 


EVOLUTIONS  OF   THE    LINE.  9 

2.    Commence  firing. 

1020.  The  fire  by  battalion  will  commence 
with  the  odd  numbered  battalions.  The  com- 
mand commence  firing,  having  been  repeated  by 
all  the  colonels,  those  of  the  odd  battalions  will 
immediately  give  the  commands  prescribed — 
School  of  the  Battalion,  for  the  execution  of  this 
particular  fire.  The  colonels  of  even  numbered 
battalions  will  not  give  their  first  command  until 
they  see  some  pieces  brought  back  to  the  shoul- 
der in  the  odd  battalion  to  their  right;  the  colo- 
nels of  the  odd  batt;ilions,  in  their  turn,  will  ob- 
serve the  same  rule  in  respect  to  the  even  battal- 
ion next  to  the  left  of  each,  and  the  fire  will  thus 
be  continued  by  alternate  battalions. 

1021.  The  fire  by  wing  will  be  executed  in 
each  battalion,  as  prescribed.  School  of  the  Bat- 
talion ;  each  colonel  having  repeated  the  com- 
mand, commence  firing,  will  immediately  give  the 
commands  indicated  for  the  execution  of  this  fire, 
without  regulating  himself  by  the  next  battalion. 

1022.  The  fire  by  company  will  be  executed 
as  prescribed,  School  of  the  Battalion. 

1023.  The  fire  by  file  will  be  executed  in  the 
following;  manner — the  General  will  command  : 


'G 


1.  Fire  hj/  file. 

1024.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel 
will  add :  1.  Battalion  ;  2.  Ready.  The  Gene- 
ral will  then  command  : 


10  KTOLUTIONS   OF   THl    Limi. 

2.    Commence  firing. 

1025.  At  this,  repeated  by  the  colonelg,  tli« 
fire  will  commence  and  be  executed  as  prescribed, 
School  of  the  Battalion. 

102G.  The  General  will  cause  each  of  the  fore- 
going fires  to  cease  by  the  sound  to  ccaae  firing^ 
or  by  a  short  roll,  which  will  be  repeated  by  the 
bugles  or  drums,  of  each  battalion,  the  moment 
it  is  heard.  As  soon  as  each  battalion  re-loads, 
its  colonel  will  cause  the  signal  to  be  given  for 
officers  to  take  their  places  after  firing. 

1027.  To  cause  the  fire  to  be  executed  by  the 
rear  rank,  the  General  will  command : 


1.  Face  1)7/  the  rear  rank. 

1027.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  coloneU 
will  immediately  add  :  1.  Battalion;  2.  About — 
Face. 

1028.  The  Generals  will  then  cause  the  several 
fires  to  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means 
prescribed  above. 

1029.  'J'he  General,  after  firing  to  the  rear, 
wishing  to  face  the  line  to  its  proper  front,  will 
command  : 

1.  Face  by  the  front  rank. 

1030.  The  colonels,  having  repeated  this  com- 
mand, will  each  immediately  add  :  1.  Battalion  ; 
2.  About — Face. 


EVOLUTIONS   01  THB   LINE.  11 

1031.  The  General,  wishing  to  give  relaxation 
to  the  line^  will  command  : 

1.  Order — Arms. 

1032.  This  having  been  repeated  and  execu- 
ted, he  will  add  : 

2.  In  place,  rest,  (or,  simply  reat.^ 

1033.  This  will  be  executed  as  prescribed— 
School  of  the  Battalion. 

1034.  If,  after  arms  are  ordered,  the  General 
wishes  to  cause  arms  to  be  stacked,  he  will  com- 
mand: 

Stac/c  arms. 

1035.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonels 
will  cause  the  stacks  to  be  fornied ;  which  being 
executed,  each  will  immediately  cause  ranks  to 
be  broken,  without  regulating  himself  by  any 
other,  in  the  manner  prescribed,  School  of  the 
Battalion. 

1036.  The  General,  wishing  to  terminate  the 
relaxation,  will  cause  a  short  roll,  or  dttfittion,  to 
be  sounded,  which  will  be  repeated  along  the  line, 
at  the  instant  it  is  heard. 

1037.  The  sound  having  ceased,  the  colonels 
will  each  command  :  Battalion,  at  ^hich  the 
men  will  resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms ;  or 
if  arms  be  stacked,  the  colonels  will  cause  the 


12  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

stacks  to  be  broken  before  giving  the  command 
Battalion. 

1038.  The  General  will  then  command  : 

Shoulder — Arms. 

1039.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  line  will 
shoulder  arms. 


PART  SECOND. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  the  order  in  hat- 
tie  to  the  order  in  column. 

Article  I. 

To  break  to  the  right  or  left  info  cohcnjii. 

1040.  The  General  wishing  to  cause  the  line 
to  break  by  company  or  by  division  to  tlie  right, 
"will  command  : 

1. — Bj/  company  (or  hy  division)  right  icheel. 

1041.  This  haying  been  repeated,  the  General 
will  add  : 

2.  March  (or  douhle-quich  March.) 

1042.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  line  will 
break  according  to  the  principles  given.  School 
of  the  Battalion. 

1043.  The  rules  relative  to  the  guides  in  that 
school,  will  be  observed  from  one  battalion  to  an- 
other, in  column ;  thus  the  leading  guide  of  one 
battalion  will  not  stir  after  the  command  front 
given  by  his  captain,  although  he  may  not  be  in 
the  direction  of  the  guide  of  the  preceding  bat- 

2 


14  STOLUTI    N3   OP    THE    LIN'B. 

lalion  ;  the  guides  not  in  the  direction  will  readi- 
ly conic  into  it  when  the  column  is  put  in  march. 
10-14.  The  Cicnoral,  wishing  to  cause  the  line 
to  break  to  the  right,  to  march  towards  the  left, 
will  command  : 

1.  Breah  to  the  right  to  march  to  the  left. 

1045.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
on  the  right  will  cause  his  battalion  to  commence 
the  movement,  which  will  be  executed  as  prescri- 
bed, School  of  the  Battalion. 

1046.  The  following  battalions  will  successively 
make  the  same  movement,  the  colonels  will  seize 
the  moment  for  causing  their  battalions  to  break, 
and  each  will  be  put  in  march  so  that  there  may 
be,  between  it?  leading  sub-divisions  and  the  near- 
est one  of  the  preceding  battalions  the  distance 
of  a  sub-division  and  twenty-two  paces. 

1047.  The  General  will  cause  the  line  to  break 
to  the  left,  according  to  the  same  principles. 

Article  II. 

To  hrcnh  to  the  rear,  hy  the  right  or  left,  into 
column,  and  to  advance  or  retire  l>y  the  right 
or  left  of  companies  or  divisions. 

1048.  The  General,  wishing  to  cause  the  line 
to  break  to  the  rear,  by  the  right  into  column  by 
company,  or  by  division,  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  (or  divisions)   to 
the  rearj  into  column. 


ITOLUTIONS   Of   THE    LINE.  15 

1049.  The  colonels  having  repeated  this  com- 
mand will  immediately  add  :  Battalion,  rights-' 
Face. 

1050.  The  General  will  then  command  : 

2.  March  (or  doulh  qutcJc-'^lARCii. 

1051.  At  this  briskly  repeated,  each  battalion 
will  break  as  prescribed,  School  of  the  Battalion. 

1052.  The  General,  wishing  to  break  into  col- 
umn by  company  (or  division)  to  the  rear  by  the 
right,  while  marching  in  line  of  battle,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companion  (or  divisions)  to  the 
rear  into  column. 

1053.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonels 
will  command,  Battalion  by  tjie  right  Jlavk. 

1054.  The  General  will  then  command  : 

2.  March,  (or  double  ^^^^t'^^-MARcn.) 

1055.  At  this  briskly  repeated,  each  battalion 
vrill  break  as  prescribed,  School  of  the  Battalion 
When  the  last  files  have  wheeled  the  General  wil 
command  : 

S.  Bi/  the  leftfiank — MARCH. 

4.    Guide  left. 

1056.  If  while  in  line  and  at  a  halt,  the  Gene- 
ral should  wish  to  advance  or  retire  by  the  right 
of  companies  or  divisions,  he  will  command  : 


l6  EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE, 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  (or  divisions)  to  the 
front  (or  rear.) 

1057.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonels 
•will  immediately  add  :  Battalion,  right — Face. 

1058.  The  General  will  then  command  : 

2.  March  (or  douhle-quic/c — March.) 

3.    Guide  right  (left)  or  (centre.) 

1059.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeat- 
ed, each  battalion  will  break  as  prescribed,  School 
of  the  Battalion  106  and  following  : 

1060.  The  movement  to  the  front  or  rear  by 
the  left  of  companies  (or  division)  will  be  execu- 
ted by  the  same  commands  and  means,  substitu- 
ting left  for  right. 

1061.  If  the  line  be  in  march,  and  the  General 
should  wish  to  advance  or  retire  by  the  right  of 
companies  or  divisions,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  (or  divisions)  to  the 
front  (or  rear.) 

1062.  Which  being  repeated,  the  colonels  will 
command  :  Battalion,  hy  the  right  flank. 

10620.  The  General  will  then  command  : 

2.  March,  (or  double-quick — March.) 
3.    Guide  right  (left)  or  (centre.) 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  17 

1063.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
(School  of  the  Battalion.) 

1064.  The  General  wishing  to  form  line  to  the 
front  while  advancing  by  the  right  or  left  of  coin- 
panieSj  or  divisions^  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  companies  (or  divisions)  into  line. 

1065.  This  being  repeated,  he  will  add  : 

2.  March  (or  double-quick — March.) 
3.    Guide  right  (left)  or  (^centre?) 

1066.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeat- 
ed, each  company  or  division  will  be  formed  into 
line,  as  prescribed,  School  of  the  Cowpavy,  No. 
154. 

1067.  If  the  General  should  wish  to  form  line 
facing  the  enemy,  while  retiring  by  the  ri;;ht  or 
left  of  companies  or  divisions,  he  will  first  cause 
them  to  face  about  while  marching,  and  immedi- 
ately form  line  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed No.  1064  and  following  : 

Article  III. 

To  ploy  the  line  into  close  column  or  mass. 

1068.  The  General,  wishing  to  ploy  the  line 
into  column  by  division  closed  in  mass,  in  rear  of 
the  first  division  of  the  first  battalion,  will  com- 
mand : 


18  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

1.    Close  column  hi/  division.     2.    On  the  first  di- 
vision, first  battalion,  right  in  front. 

1069.  These  eomniands  having  been  repeated, 
each  colonel  will  add  :  battalion,  right — Face, 
which  will  be  executed  by  the  desi»:nated  or  di- 
recting battalion,  as  prescribed,  No.  120,  and  fol- 
lowing :  but  in  the  others,  all  the  divisions  will 
face  to  the  right,  and  the  chief  of  the  first  divi- 
sion, in  each  of  these  battalions,  will  place  him- 
self by  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 

1070.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  Gen- 
eral will  add  : 

3.  March  (or  double-quick — March.) 

1071.  At  this  briskly  repeated,  the  colonel  of 
the  first  battalion  will  ploy  it  in  rear  of  its  first 
division,  as  indicated,  No.  VZH,  and  following. 
Each  of  the  other  colonels  will,  in  like  manner, 
ploy  his  battalion  from  a  halt,  in  rear  of  its  right 
division;  but,  pending  the  execution  of  the  move- 
ment, this  division  will  stand  faced  to  the  flank: 
The  second,  third  and  fourth  divisions,  each  con- 
ducted by  its  chief,  will  be  halted  as  it  successive- 
ly takes  its  place  in  the  battalion  colunm,  the  chief 
remaining  by  the  side  of  his  right  guide;  the 
fifth  will  enter  in  like  manner,  and  when  its  head 
shall  be  at  eight  or  ten  paces  from  the  right  flank 
of  the  column,  the  colonel  will  command  :  1,  Bat- 
talion, forward;  2.  guide  hft,  and  H.  3Iarch,  or 
double-quick — March,   at   the    instant   the  right 


E70LUTION3    OF    THE    LINE.  9 

guide  of  this   division  is  abreast  wita  the  others. 

1072.  At  the  command  march,  each  battalion 
thus  formed  in  mass  will  put  itself  in  march,  di- 
recting itself  to  the  rear  towards  its  point  of  en- 
trance into  tlie  general  column  ;  taking  the  short- 
est line,  each  division  will  conform  its  movements 
to  that  of  the  first,  preserving  the  distance  of  six 
paces  from  one  guide  to  the  next,  so  as  its  first  di- 
vision shall  enter  the  column  perpendicularly,  and 
leave  a  distance  of  nine  paces  between  its  guide 
and  the  guide  of  the  last  division  of  the  prece- 
ding battalion  :  the  other  divisions  will  direct 
themselves  parallelly  to  the  first,  and  enter  suc- 
cessively into  the  general  cnkunn,  the  chiefs  of 
divisions  being  up  with  the  left  guides  of  the  col- 
umn, will  conform  themselves,  to  what  is  prescri- 
bed Nos.  1 25-6-7. 

1073.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  each  battalion 
will  detach  himself  thirty  or  forty  paces  in  ad- 
vance, to  indicate  the  point  of  entrance  into  the 
column  for  his  first  division,  and  as  each  of  his 
guides  successively  arrives,  he  will  assure  him  on 
the  direction. 

1074.  The  General,  or  oilicer  charged  with  the 
execution  of  his  orders,  will  place  himself  in  front 
of  the  left  guide  of  the  directing  division,  to  su- 
perintend the  formation  of  the  general  column, 
and  to  see  that  the  left  guides  accurately  cover 
each  other  in  file.  This  rule  is  gnirral  for  all 
plof/menfs,  whatever  the  division  on  which  they 
may  be  executed. 

1075.  The  line  will  be  ployed  in  front  by  the 


20 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 


Fame  commands,  substituting  left  for  ri(jlit  in  front. 
In  this  caso,  the  first  battalion  will  l-xecute  the 
movement  in  the  manner  indicated,  No.  loo,  and 
following. 

107G.  The  other  battalions  will  each  execute 
the  movement  in  like  manner,  conforming  itself 
to  what  follows  :  the  first  division,  which  will  have 
faced  to  the  right  with  the  others,  will  remain  by 
the  flank  whilst. the  battalion  is  ploying  in  front 
of  it,  the  second,  third  and  fourth,  after  having 
taken  position  in  the  battalion  column,  will  be 
halted  by  their  chiefs,  who  will  remain  by  the 
sides  of  their  right  guides,  and  when  the  head  of 
the  fourth  shall  be  at  eight  or  ten  paces  from  the 
right  flank  of  the  column,  the  colonel,  observing 
the  order  of  time  ijidicated,  No.  1071,  will  com- 
mand :  i.  Battalion, forward }  2.  Guide  right; 
8.  March. 

1077.  At  the  command  march,  each  battalion, 
directing  itself  diagonally  to  the  front,  instead  of 
to  the  rear,  will  be  conducted  and  established  in 
the  general  column,  with  slight  variations,  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  1072  ;  arrived  at  twelve  or  fourteen 
paces  from  the  flank  of  that  column,  the  head  of 
the  first  division  will  incline  to  the  right,  instead 
of  the  left,  in  order  to  enter  perpendicularly,  and 
to  take  its  distance  of  nine  paces;  the  other  di- 
visions will  conform  themselves  to  the  movement 
of  the  first,  and  the  chiefs  of  the  whole  will  each 
conduct  liis  division  till  its  head  is  nearly  up  with 
the  right  guides  of  the  general  column  ;  he  will 


EVOLUTIONS  OF    THE    LINE.  2l- 

then  lialt  his  division,  face  it  to  the  front,  and 
align  it  by  the  right,  its  right  guide  having  faced 
to  the  rear  in  placing  himself  on  the  direction. 
I'he  lieutenant-colonels  will  conform  them.^elves  to 
what  is  prescribed,  No.  lOTo. 

1078.  As  each  battalion  takes  its  position  in 
the  column  in  front  of  the  directing  division,  its 
colonel  will   command  :  guides,  ahout — Facb. 

1079.  To  ploy  the  line  in  rear,  or  in  front  of 
the  last  divih^ion  of  the  eighth  battalion,  the  Gene- 
ral will  command  ; 

1.  Close  column  hy  divisw7i.  2.  On  the  fifth 
division,  eighth  battalion,  left  (or  right)  in  front. 
3.  March  (or  double-quick) — March. 

1080.  These  movements  will  be  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  given  in  the  two  preced- 
ing cases,  but  by  inverse  means  :  the  fifth  (a  last) 
division  of  each  subordinate  battalion,  being  the 
first  to  take  its  position  in  the  general  column,  it 
will  be  conducted  by  the  lieutenant-colonel,  and 
the  other  divisions  will  regulate  theniselves  by  it. 

1081.  If  instead  of  ploying  the  line  on  the 
first  division,  right  battalion,  or  the  last  division 
of  the  left  as  in  the  preceding  cases,  the  General 
wishes  to  execute  the  movement  on  an  interior  di- 
vision of  any  other  battalion,  he  will    command  : 

1.  Close  column  by  division.  2.  On  such  divi- 
sion (such)  battalion,  right  (or  left^  in  front.  3. 
March  (or  double-quick — March. 


22  EVDI-CTIONS    CF    THE    LINE. 

1082.  "Wlictlier  the  rhj^ht  or  left  is  to  be  in 
front,  the  designated  or  directing  battalion  will 
czecute  its  niovenient,  as  if  it  were  alone. 

10S8.  If  the  ri<;htis  to  be  in  front,  all  the  bat- 
talions in  line  to  the  right  of  the  directing  on« 
•will  execute  the  movement  as  is  indicated  for 
ploying  tlie  line  to  the  front  on  the  left  division, 
and  the  left  battalions  will  execute  the  movement 
as  is  indicated  fur  ploying  to  the  rear,  on  the  right 
division  ;  if  the  left  is  to  be  in  front,  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  inversely. 

1084.  If  the  line  be  in  march,  to  ploy  it  in 
rear  of  the  first  division,  the  General  will  com- 
mand : 

1.    Clo&t  column,  hy  division.     2.    On  the  first  di- 
vision, first  battcdion. 

1085.  This  having  been  promptly  repeated, 
the  colonels  will  add:  Battalion,  hj  the  ricjhtflanJi^ 

1086.  At  this  command  each  chief  of  division 
will  move  rapidly  before  the  centre  of  his  divi- 
sion and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right:  the  chief 
of  the  first  division,  first  battalion,  will  caution  it 
to  co.ntinue  to  march  to  the  front. 

1087.  The  General  will  then  command: 

3.  DouUe-quich — March. 

1088.  At  this  briskly  repeated,  the  movement 
will  be  executed  by  the  designated  battalion,  ajB 
prescribed,  No.  151  and  following;  out  in  the 
others  all  the  divisions  will  face,  and  the  first  di- 


E.VOLUTIONS  OFTHE  LINF. 


/^/  L 


BYOLUTIONS   07    THE    LINE.  23 

visions  will  mark  time,  by  the  command  of  their 
diiefs,  until  their  battalions  are  massed,  when 
^they  will  take  their  places  in  the  general  column 
'as  prescribed,  No.  1072.  As  soon  as  the  left 
guides  of  each  battalion  are  up  with  the  left 
guides  of  the  directing  battalion,  each  colonel 
will  command  : 

1.  Battalion^    hj    the    left  flank — qulch   time— 
March.      2.   Guide  left. 

1089.  In  the  several  ployments,  the  General 
will  take,  in  preference,  as  the  dircctin,^  division, 
that  of  the  right  or  left  of  the  battalions^  on 
which  the  movement  is  to  be  executed. 


PART  THIRD. 


Article  I. 
To  march  in  column  at  fall  dUiaiicc. 

1090.  Tho  General,  \7ishing  to  put  the  column 
in  march,  ^'ill  indicate  to  the  colonel  of  the  lead- 
ing battalion  the  direction  to  be  taken  by  the 
headmo;^t  guide,  and  the  colonel  will  iiiiniediate- 
ly  prescribe  to  this  guide  the  means  to  be  em- 
ployed to  assure  the  direction  of  the  march, 
according  to  the  principles  established,  Nos. 
161-3. 

1091.  These  dispositions  being  madc;,  the  Gen- 
eral  will  command  : 

1.  Column,  forward. 

1092.  The  colonels  having  repeated  this  com- 
mand, will  immediately  add:  (juUlc  hft,  if  the 
right  he  in  Iront,  or  yuidc  rUjlit,  if  the  left  be  in 
front. 

1093.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

■   2.  Qiikk — March  (or  douhk-quicJc  March.) 

1094.  At  this,  repeated  with  the  greatest  ra- 
pidity, the  column  will  put  itself  in  march. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINK.  25 

1095.  The  o;uicle  of  the  leading  subdivision 
will  maintain  himself  on  the  direction  which  has 
been  indicated  to  him,  by  the  means  prescribed, 
School  of  the  Battalion,  and  the  following:  guides 
will  each  march  in  the  trace  of  the  one  who  im- 
mediately precedes  him,  without  regard  to  the 
general  direction. 

1096.  The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  leading 
battalion  will  see  that  the  headmost  guide  does 
not  deviate  from  the  direction  he  ought  to  pur- 
sue, and  the  same  officer  of  each  following  bat- 
talion will  also  see  that  his  leading  guide  pre- 
serves a  distance  equal  to  the  front  of  his  .subdi- 
vision and  twenty  two  paces,  which  ought  to  sep- 
arate the  battalions. 

1097.  When  a  column  has  to  prolong  its  march 
on  a  given  line,  in  order  to  form  upon  it  to  the 
left  (or  right)  into  line  of  battle,  the  General  will 
always  cause  that  line  to  be  marked  by  one  of 
the  means  prescribed,  Nos.  190-91.  The  colors 
and  general  guides  will  throw  themselves  out  on 
that  line. 

1098.  If,  in  this  case,  the  column  arrive  in 
front  or  in  rear  of  the  line  of  battle,  the  General 
will  detach,  in  advance,  two  aides-de-camp,  or 
other  mounted  officers,  to  ascertain  the  interme- 
diate points  between  the  points  of  direction  to  the 
right  and  left ;  that  being  found,  one  of  those  of- 
ficers will  place  himself  on  the  line  at  the  point 
at  which  the  head  of  the  column  will  arrive,  and 
the  coluniH  will    conform   itself  to  what  is  pre- 

3 


26  EVOLUTIOXS    OF    THE    LINB. 

scribed,  No.  175,  and  following,  or  No.  184,  and 
following. 

1099.  The  column  being  in  march,  the  Gene- 
ral, to  cau.se  the  ahout  to  be  executed  while 
marching,  will  command : 

1.  Column,  ri(ji>t  ahout.     2.  MARCH.     3.    Guide 
right. 

1100.  Vvhich  having  been  promptly  repeated, 
will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  ScJlooI  of  the 
Battalion. 

Article  II. 

Column  in  route. 

1101.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  Gen- 
eral wibh  to  put  it  in  march  in  the  route  step,  he 
will  give  the  commands  prescribed  for  tb.e  march 
in  the  cadenced  step,  with  this  diiterence — the 
command  viarch  will  be  preceded  by  that  of 
route  sfcj),  which  will  be  repeated  by  the  colo- 
nels. 

1102.  The  column  being  in  march,  the  Gene- 
ral, in  order  to  cause  it  to  pass  from  ihc  cadenced 
to  the  route  step;  and  the  reverse,  will  give  the 
commjirids  pre^<cribed,  Nos.  312,310. 

1103  All  the  principles  relative  to  columns  in 
route,  having  been  developed  in  the  Schools  of 
the  Coiiij-aiiy  and  Battalion,  it  only  remains  to 
add  here  tliut,  wh  m  a  column  of  many  battalions 


EVOLClMOJfS   OF    THE    LINI.  27 

encounters  a  defile,  ^vhich  obliges  it  to  diminish 
the  front  of  subdivisions,  this  movement  will 
only  be  made  as  each  battalion  successively  ar- 
rives on  the  ground  at  which  the  preceding  bat- 
talion had  executed  it. 

1104.  Thus,  lor  example,  a  column  forvied  by 
company,  encountering  a  defile  which  will  only 
receive  the  front  of  a  platooa,  the  colonel  of  the 
leading  battalion  will  at  one*,  or  successively, 
according  to  the  order  of  the  General,  dindnish 
front  by  platoon ;  but  the  colonel  of  the  next  bat- 
talion will  not  repeat  the  commands  of  the  pre- 
ceding colonel  until  his  battalion  arrives  at  the 
same  point,  and  so  on  of  the  others. 

1105.  The  chief  of  the  column  will  take  care 
*'  regulate  the  rate  of  the  march  according  to 
the  ground  and  other  circumstances;  he  will  al- 
ways leave  with  the  rear  of  the  column  an  aide- 
de-camp  to  bring  him  prompt  intelligence  in  case 
it  find  a  difficulty  in  following. 

Article  III. 

To  cJiange  direction  in  column  at  fall  distance. 

1106.  The  General,  wishing  the  column  to 
change  direction,  will  send  an  aid  to  the  point  of 
change,  and  notify  the  leading  colonel  a  little  be- 
fore arriving  at  that  point. 

1107.  Tiie  change  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed,  No.  231;  and  fol- 
lowinfj. 


28  IVOLUTIONS    OF   TIM   LINK. 

1108.  Those  rules  will  be  observed  in  columns 
in  mauiDcuvre,  altliuugli  marching,  at  the  moment, 
in  the  route  step. 

Article  IV. 

1100.  The  General,  wishing  to  halt  the  column, 
will  command : 

1.  Column.     2.  EalL 

1110.  This  being  repeated,  will  be  promptly 
executed. 

1111.  The  column  being  halted,  if  the  General 
wish  to  form  it  to  the  left  (or  riglii)  into  line  of 
battle,  he  will  assure  the  direction  of  the  guides 
in  the  following  manner. 

1112.  If  the  general  direction  of  the  column 
be  nearly  in  conformity  with  his  wishes,  he  will 
confine  himself  to  rectifying  the  positions  of  such 
guides  as  may  be  without,  or  within,  the  direc- 
tion :  to  this  end,  he  will  command  : 

Guides,  cover  in  file. 

1113.  At  this,  repeated  by  the  colonels,  the 
lieutenant  colonels  and  majors  will  promptly 
cause  the  guides  who  may  not  be  on  the  direc- 
tion to  cover  each  other  accurately  in  file. 

1114.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  General  should 
think  it  necessary  to  give  a  new  direction,  and 
the  <reueral  jjruides  be  not  on  the  flank  of  the  col- 


EVOLUTIONS   OF  THE    LINE.  29 

umn,  "he  (or  a  substitute)  will  throw  himself  fiff- 
teen  or  twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  head,  place 
himself,  facing  to  the  rear,  on  the  direction  which 
he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  guides,  select  in  rear 
of  the  column  the  second  point  which  determines 
that  direction,  and  promptly  establish  on  it  the 
leading  general  guide,  and  the  colour-bearer  of 
the  same  battalion  ;  this  being  executed,  the  Gen- 
eral will  command  : 

1.  Colours  and  general  guides  on  the  line. 

1115.  At  this,  the  colour-bearers  and  general 
guides  will. throw  themselves  on  the  flank  of  the 
column,  and  cover  accurately  the  headmost  two 
w^ho  have  just  been  established  by  the  General; 
the  lieutenant  colonels  and  majors  'will  promptly 
assure  (see  Xo.  130)  on  the  direction  the  general 
guides  of  their  respective  battalions. 

1116.  The  General,  seeing  all  the  colours  and 
general  guides  of  the  column  correctly  established 
on  the  direction,  will  immediately  add  : 

2.  Guides,  on  the  line. 

1117.  i-\t  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  guides  will 
place  themselves  on  the  direction  of  the  colours, 
facing  to  the  head  of  the  column  ;  the  lieutenant 
colonel  of  each  battalion,  placed  in  front,  will  ?s- 
sure  the  direction  of  the  guides  of  its  leadina- 
wing,  and  the  major,  from  a  point  in  the  rear  of 


30  EVOLUTIONS    OP    THE    LINE. 

his  battalion,  v^iV  assure,  in   like  manner,  the  re- 
maining guides  of  the  same  battalion. 

11  18.  The  guides  of  subdivision,  in  placing 
themselves  on  tlie  direction  of  the  colours,  will 
each  align  himself  correctly  on  the  colour  lances 
in  front  of  him,  and  not  on  the  subdivision 
guides;  he  will  take  care  to  place  himsell' exactly 
at  subdivision  distance  from  the  guide  next  pre- 
ceding hiu).  Each  colour-bearer  will  hold  his 
lance  perpendicularly  between  his  eyes. 

1119.  The  subdivision  guides  being  established 
on  the  directi(»n,  the  colonels,  without  waiting  for 
each  other,  will  immediately  command  :  li/t  (or 
ri'^hf) — Dress. 

1120  At  this,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  subdivision,  each  subdivision  will  incline  to 
its  guide  and  be  promptly  aligned.  If  the  new 
direction  be  such  that  a  subdivision  find  itself 
many  paces  from  it,  the  chief  of  the  subdivision 
will  cause  it  to  m;irch  by  the  flank. 

1121.  If  the  general  guides  be  on  the  flank  of 
the  column,  the  (general  will  first  place  himself 
behind  the  colour-bearer  of  the  leading  battalion, 
to  see  whether  this  colour-bearer  and  the  prece- 
ding general  guide  are  accurately  on  the  prolon- 
gation of  the  two  points  in  front  upon  which 
they  had  marched,  and,  if  necessary,  to  rectify 
their  positions ;  the  General  will  then  throw 
himself  in  front,  and  face  to  the  leading  gen- 
eral guide;    if  the  colours   and  general   guides 


•    EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINE.  31 

are  not  exactly  on   the    direction,   lie  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Colours  and  general  guides,  cover  in  file. 

1122.  At  tin's,  the  lieutenant  colonels  will 
promptly  cause  the  colour  and  general  guides  of 
their  respective  battalions  to  cover  those  of  the 
preceding  battalions,  after  which  the  General  will 
add: 

2,  Guides,  on  the  line. 

1123.  This  will  be  executed  and  followed  up 
in  the  manner  indicated,  Nos.  1117-20. 

Article  Y. 

To  close  the  colwnn   to  half  distance,  or  in 
juass. 

1124.  ^\^hcthcr  the  column  of  several  battal- 
ions be  formed  by  company  or  "by  division,  the 
distance  between  battalions,  when  the  subdivi- 
sions are  at  half  wheeling  distance  from  each 
other,  will  be  equal  to  the  front  of  a  subdivision  ; 
this  distance  between  battalions  will  be  reduced 
to  nine  paces,  measured  from  the  first  guide  of  a 
following  battalion  to  the  last  guide  of  the  prece- 
ding one,  when  the  battalions  are  closed  in 
mass. 

,1125.  A  column  by  company,  at  full  distance 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINK.  1 

right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  \\licn  the  General 
}-hall  wish  to  close  it  to  half  distance,  he  will, 
command : 

1.  To  hid/  distance  close  column. 

1126.  This  havin^;  been  repeated,  the  General 
will  add  : 

2.  March  (^r  dotihle-quwl:  March.) 

1127.  At  the  co'rmand  March,  the  leading 
battalion  will  close  to  platoon  distance  on  its  first 
company,  as  prescibed,  No.  253,  and  follow- 
ing. 

1128.  The  other  battalion  will  continue  to 
marcn;  when  the  leading  company  of  the  second 
battalion  is  at  c  mpany  dis  ance  from  the  rear 
company  of  the  first  bittalion,  its  captain  will 
halt  it  and  align  it  by  the  left;  the  other  compa- 
nies of  this  battalion  will  close  on  the  leading 
one,  and  the  following  battalions  will  conform 
themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  second. 

1129.  The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  first  bat- 
talion will  assure  the  positions  oi  the  guides  as 
prescribed,  School  of  the  Battcdion. 

1130.  The  1  eutenant  colonel  of  each  following 
battalion  will  throw  himself  in  advance  to  the 
point  at  which  the  leading  con;paiiy  ought  to  be 
halted^  and   he   will  assu'  e  the  positions  of  the 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE.  33 

guides  by  placing  himself  in  rear  of  each  as  the 
companies  are  successively  closed. 

liol.  If  the  column  b^  in  march,  the  General 
^ill  cause  it  to  close  by  the  same  command, 

1132.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double- 
quick  time,  at  the  first  command,  the  captain  of 
the  leading  company  fi  st  battalion,  will  command 
quick  time ;  at  the  command  march,  the  reading 
company  will  march  in  quick,  and  all  the  others 
in  double-quick  tin,e;  and  as  rach  arrives  at  its 
proper  distance  from  the  preceding  one,  its  Qw'mi 
will  cause  it  to  inarch  in  quick  time,  and  when 
the  rearmost  company  shall  have  gained  its  dis- 
tance, the  General  will  command  : 

DovMe-qidclc — March. 

1133.  When  the  General  shall  wish  to  halt  the 
Icolumn,  and  to  cause  it  to  close  to  half  distance 
at  the  .-ame  time,  he  will  have  the  captain  of  the 
leading  company  notified  of  his  intention,  who, 
at  the  command  march,  will  halt  his  company 
and  align  it  by  the  left. 

1134.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  the  Gene- 
ral, if  he  wish  to  close  it  to  half  distance  on  the 
rearmost  company  of  the  last  battalion,  will  com- 
mand : 


34  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINK. 

1.  On  ilir  tenth  cornpani/,  eighth  hattaUonj  to  hnljl 
(h'staucf\  close,  column.. 

11.15.  Tliis  li.'ivln^  )»cen  repeated,  each  colonel 
^rill  coiiiinan<l  :  1.  Battalion,  ahout — Face;  2. 
Column,  forward ;   ".  Guide  right. 

lloG.  At  the  first  coininund  of  its  colonel,  the 
battalions  will  face  about;  each  guide  will  remain 
abreast  with  the  front  rank,  now  the  rear;  the 
rearmost  con)pa])y  of  the  last  battalion  will  re- 
main faced  to  the  front.  At  the  third  command, 
all  the  captains  will  place  themselves  two  paces 
outside  of  their  guides.  The  General  will  then 
add: 

2.  March  Cot  douhh-quick  March.) 

1136].  At  the  command  march  the  eighth  bat- 
talion wll  close  on  its  rearmost  company,  as  pre- 
scribed; No.  270.  The  other  battalions  will  close 
on  the  eighth  ;  when  the  tenth  company  of  the 
seventh  battilion  is  at  the  prescribed  distance,  its 
captain  will  halt  it,  fiicc  it  to  the  front,  and 
align  it  by  the  left,  its  guide  remaining  faced  to 
the  rear;  the  other  companies  will  close  upon 
this  company,  and  the  remaining  battalions  will 
each  execute  what  is  just  prescribed  for  the 
seventh, 

1137.  The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  eighth 
battalion  will  assure  the  positions  of  his  guides 
as  indicated,  No.  272 ;  the  ;2  utenant  colonels  of 


"EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  35 

the  other  battalions  m\\  conform  themselves  to 
what  is  prescribed,  No.  1130.  If  the  movement 
be  execufed  in  double  qnick  time,  each  capiain, 
in  turn,  will  halt,  and  command  :  such  coinpan}/^ 
right  about — Hali.  At  this  command^  the  com- 
pany will  face  right  about  and  halt. 

1138.  Each  colonel  will  lace  his  i^uides  to  the 
front  as  soon  as  all  the  companies  of  his  battalion 
are  aligned. 

1139.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the 
General  shi|ll  v/ii^h  to  close  it  on  the  last  companj 
of  the  rearmo.-it  battalion,  he  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  tenth  rompoiii/,  eijlith  hattalion,  to  half 

disLai  Cfj,  clone  column. 

1140.  Thin  having  been  promptly  repeated, 
each  colonel  will  command :  1.  Bat  alion,  right 
about. 

1141.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March  (or  doubh-quick  March.)    3.  Guide 

right. 

1142.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  eighth 
battalion  w'il)  close  upon  its  rearmost  company,  as 
pr8.<^cribed,  No.  274,  and  following,  the  other  bat- 
talions will  close  on  the  eighth  as  prescribed,  No. 
113G,  and  ioil;  v^-ing. 

1143.  The  column  being  at  halt,  the  General, 
wishing  to  close  io  on  the  headmost  company  of 


30  EVOIXTIONS    OF    THE    LIVE. 

an   interior    battalion,    say    the    fifth,    will    com- 
mand : 

1.  On   thf  first  rompani/,  fifth   Ixittalion^  to  half  \ 

distance,  close  column.  I    ^ 

1144.  This  liaving  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  each  battalion,  in  front  of  the  fifth,  will  com- 
mand :  1.  Ihtttalion,  about — Face  ;  2.  Colunuiy 
forward ;  3.  Guide  right.  The  General  will  then 
add: 

2.  March  (or  doullc  quick  March.) 

1145.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated 
by  all  the  colonels,  ti.c  fifth  battalion,  and  those 
in  its  rear,  will  close  up  as  prescribed,  Xo.  1127, 
and  followinir,  the  battalions  in  front  of  the 
fifth  will  clos.:  as  indicated.  No.  1136,.  and  follow- 
ing, the  left  company  of  the  fourth  battalion  will 
close  on  the  directing  company,  leaving  the  inter- 
val prescribed.  No.  1124. 

114G.  A  column  by  division,  at  full  distance, 
will  close  to  half  distance  by  the  same  commands 
and  means. 

1147  The  column  being  at  full  or  half  dis- 
tance, the  General  will  cause  it  to  close  in  mass  by 
the  same  commands  substituting  the  indication, 
column,  close  in  mass,  for  that  of  to  half  distance, 
close  column. 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE.  37 

1148.  A  column  left  in  front  will  execute  these 
various  movements  on  the  same  principles. 

Article    VI. 

To  march  in  column  at  half  clktance,  or  closed  in 
mass. 

1149.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass 
being  at  a  halt,  when  the  General  shall  wish  to 
cause  it  to  march,  he  will  give  the  commands  pre- 
scribed for  putting  in  march  a  column  at  full  dis- 
tance. 

1150.  The  means  of  direction  indicated  for  a 
column  at  full  distance  will  be  the  same  for  a  col- 
umn at  half  distance  or  in  mass ;  except  that 
the  colours  and  general  guides  will  not  stop   out. 

1151.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass, 
being  on  inarch,  the  General  will  halt  it  by  the 
same  commands  as  if  it  were  a  column  at  full  dis- 
tance, and  if  afterwards  he  shall  wish  to  give  a 
general  direction  to  the  guides,  he  will  establish 
the  two  leading  guides  on  the  direction  he  may 
choose,  and  then  command  : 

Guides,  cover  in  file. 

1152.  At  this,  repeated  by  the  colonels,  the 
guides  of  the  column  will  accurately  cover  each 
other,  in  file,  and  be  assured  on  the  new  direction 
by  the  lieutenant-colonels  and  majors ;  which 
being  executed,  the  colonels  will  cause  their  bat- 
talions to  be  aligned  as  prescribed,  No.  1119-20. 

4 


38  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

1153.  A  column  by  division  or  company,  wheth- 
er at  lull  or  half  distance  or  in  mass,  at  a  halt  or 
marching,  can  be  faced  to  the  right  or  left,  and 
marched  off  in  the  new  direction. 

Article  YII. 

To  clianfjC   iJircction   in  column   at  half  distance. 

1154.  A  column  at  half  distance,  being  in 
march,  and  having  to  change  direction,  will  exe- 
cute the  movmiicnt  as  prescribed  for  a  column  at 
full  distance,  with  the  difference  indicated,  No. 
287. 

Article  YIIT. 

To  change  dirrction  in  column  closed  in  jyiass. 

Isf.  In  marching. 

1155.  A  column  closed  in  mass,  being  in 
march,  and  having  to  change  direction,  the  Ge- 
neral will  command : 

1.  To  change  direction  to  the  right  (or  left.")  2. 
Bij  battalion  in  mass,  hy  the  head  of  column, 
take  distance. 

1156.  These  commands  having  been  repeated, 
the  colonels  will  cause  their  battalions  to  take  the 
guide  on  the  flank  opposite  to  the  change  of  di- 
rection, if  it  be  not  already  there;  the  colonel  of 
the  first  or  lending  battalion  will  put  it  in  march 


EVOLUTIONS  OF    TUE    LINE.  39 

in  double-quick  time,  and  when  it  arrives  at  the 
point  indicated,  it  will  change  direction  by  the 
means  prescribed,  No.  288,  and  following. 

1157.  The  colonel  of  the  second  battalion  will 
put  it  in  march  as  soon  as  his  leading  division  is 
at  the  distance  of  forty  paces  from  the  last  of  the 
preceding  battalion;  he  will  next  commence  the 
change  of  direction  at  the  point  where  the  first 
had  commenced,  and  in  the  same  manner. 

1158.  The  colonels  of  the  other  battalions,  as 
they  successively  have  the  distance  of  forty  paces, 
will  each  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed 
for  the  colonel  of  the  second. 

1159.  As  soon  as  the  first  battalion  shall  have 
marched  in  the  new  direction  a  distance  equal  to 
the  depth  of  the  column  in  mass,  the  General  will 
command : 

1.    Column  close  in  mass. 

1160.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  first,  will  caution  it  to  continue  the  march, 
in  quick  time  ;  the  colonels  of  the  other  battal- 
ions will  command:  1.  Battalion.     Douhle  qiiick. 

.   1161.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March. 

1162.  This  having  been  repeated,  all  the  bat- 
talions except  the  first,  will  march  in  double  quick 
time,  and  as  each  arrives  at  the  distance  of  nine 
paces  from  that  which  precedes  it,  will,  by  com- 


40  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LIVE. 

mand  of  its   colonel,  resume  the  march  in  quid 
time. 

1163.  The  foregoing  changes  of  direction  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  in  a 
column,  left  in  front. 

2d.    To  change  direction  from  a  Jutlt. 

1104.  The  column  being  halted,  when  the  Ge-j 
ncral  shall  wish  to  give  it  a  new  direction,  and  in 
which  it  is  to  remain,  he  will  cause  it  to  execute 
this  movement  by  the  flanks  of  sub-divisions  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed,  School  of  the 
Battalion. 

11G5.  The  column  having  the  right  in  front, 
when  the  General  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change 
direction  to  the  left,^he  will  cause  two  markers  to 
be  established  on  the  new  direction  for  the  lead- 
ing sub-division,  and  comm-and : 

1.  Change  direction  hy  the  right  JlanJc. 

IIGG.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel 
will  command  :  hattalion,  right — Face.  The  Ge- 
neral will  then  add  : 

2.  March  (or  douUe-quicJc — March.) 

1167.  At  this,  the  column  will   march  by  the  I 
right  flank   into  the  new   direction  in  conformity 
with  the  principles  prescribed.  No.  308,  and  fol- 
lowing. 

1168.  The  colonels  will  sec,  pending  the  exe- 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE   LINE.  41 

cution  of  the  movement,  that  the  files  do  not  open 
out,  that  the  sub-divisions  enter  in  a  square  vrith 
the  new  direction,  and  that  the  prescribed  dis- 
tance between  their  battalions  be  exactly  observ- 
ed. 

1169.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  leading 
battalion  will  place  himself  some  paces  in  front, 
and  face  to  the  guide  of  the  first  sub-division  of 
the  column,  in  order  to  assure  the  direction  of 
the  guides  of  his  battalion  ;  the  lieutenant-colonel 
of  each  of  the  following  battalions  will  place  him- 
self successively  behind  its  left  guides  as  they  ar- 
rive on  the  new  direction,  to  assure  them  in  their 
positions. 

1170.  A  column  in  mass  will  change  direction 
to  the  right  by  inverse  means. 

Article   IX. 

Being   in  column   at  half  distance,  or  closed  in 
mass,  to  take  distance. 

1st.    To  take  distance  hi/  the  head  of  column. 

1171.  A  column  by  company  being  at  half  dis- 
tance and  at  a  halt,  when  the  General  shall  wish 
to  cause  it  to  take  distance,  he  will  indicate  to 
the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  leading  battalion  the 
point  of  direction  in  front,  and  then  command : 

Bf/  the  head  of  column  take  icheeling  distance. 

1172.  This  having  been  repeated^  the  first  bat- 


42  EVOLUTIONS    CF    THE    LINE. 

talion  will  take  its  distances  by  the  means  indicat- 
ed, No.  324,  and  following. 

1173.  Each  of  the  other  battalions  will  take  its 
distances  in  like  manner;  but  it  will  not  com- 
mence its  movement  till  the  last  sub-division  of 
the  battalion  immediately  preceding  has  left,  be- 
sides the  space  equal  to  the  front  of  a  company, 
the  distance  of  twent3^-two  paces,  which  ought  to 
separate  battalions  in-  Hne  of  battle. 

2d.    To  take  distance  on  the  rear  of  the  column. 

1174.  The  column  being  at  half  distance,  and 
at  a  halt,  when  the  General  shall  wish  to  cause  it 
to  take  distances  on  the  rearmost  company,  eighth 
battalion,  he  will  first  determine  the  direction  of 
the  line  of  battle,  and  direct  two  markers  to  be 
placed  on  this  line  as  prescribed.  No.  333.  ,The 
markers  being  established,  he  will  cause  this  line  to 
be  prolonged  by  one  of  the  means  indicated,  No. 
190,  and  following;  and  as  soon  as  these  disposi- 
tions are  made,  he  will  command: 

1.    Oil  the   tenth  compaw/,  eighth   hattaJion,  iahe 
loheeling  distance. 

1175.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonels 
will  each  command :  1.  Coiumnj  forward)  2 
Guide  left. 

117G.  At  this,  the  captains  will  place'  them- 
selves two  paces  outside  of  the  directing  flank. 
1177.  The  lieuteaantr  colonel  and  the  major  of 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  43 

the  first  battalion  will  remain  in  their  places  in 
column  •  in  the  other  battalions  each  lieutenant 
colonel  will  throw  himself  abreast  with  his  rear- 
most company^  and  the  majors  each  abreast  with 
his  first. 

1178.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March,      (or  douUe-qiiich.   March.) 

1179.  At  this,  the  whole  column,  except  the 
directing  company,  will  step  off:  the  lieutenant 
colonel  of  the  first  battalion  will  take  care  to  di- 
rect the  leading  guide  a  little  within  the  line  of 
battle. 

1180.  The  eighth  battalion  will  take  its  dis- 
tances as  prescribed,  No.  oo4,  and  following. 

1181.  The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  seventh 
battalion  when  he  sees  that  only  one  company  of 
the  eighth  remains  to  take  its  distance,  will  hasten 
to  the  point  where  his  rearmost  company  ought 
to  be  halted,  observing  to  take,  between  it  and 
the  first  company  of  the  eighth  battalion,  a  dis- 
tance equal  to  the  front  of  a  company  and  twenty- 
two  paces. 

1182.  AVhen  his  rearmost  company  shall  ar- 
rive abreast  with  the  lieutenant  colonel,  its  cap- 
tain will  halt  and  align  it  by  the  left.  The  other 
companies  of  the  seventh  will  take  their  distan- 
ces as  prescribed  for  those  of  the  eighth  battalion. 

1183.  The  remaining  battalions  will  succes- 
sively execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  seventh.  The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  first 
will  direct  the  march  of  its  leading  guide  to  the 


44  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LIKE. 

point  where  the  rearmost  company  of  this  bat- 
talion ought  to  be  halted,  and  then  the  major  will 
replace  him  momentarily  at  the  head  of  the  co- 
lumn. 

1184.  The  colonels,  lieutenant  colonels,  and 
majors,  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed for  each,  Nos.  338-40. 

od.    To  take   distances  on  the  liead  o/  the  column. 

1185.  AVhen  the  General  shall  wish  to  cause 
distances  to  be  taken  on  the  head  of  the  column, 
he  will  direct  two  markers  to  be  placed  on  the 
line  of  direction  as  prescribed,  No.  341,  and 
cause  this  line  to  be  prolonged  to  the  rear  b}^  the 
means  indicated  Nq.  1174  •  these  dispositions  be- 
ing made,  he  will  command  : 

1.    On    the  first   compain/,  first   hattalton,    take 
wheeling  distance. 

1186.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel 
will  command  :  1.  Battalion,  ahout — Face  ;  2. 

Column,  for  war  d  ;  3.    Guide  right. 

1187.  At  the  third  command,  the  captains  will 
place  themselves  two  paces  outside  of  the  direct- 
ing flank. 

1188.  The  lieutenant  eolonel  of  the  eighth  bat- 
talion will  throw  himself  abreast  with  his  now 
leading  company,  and  the  major  abreast  with  its 
rearmost  one ;  in  the  other  battalions  the  positions 
of  the  lieutenant  colonels  and  majors  will  be  the 
reverse. 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE   LINE.  45 

1189.  The  General  -svili  then  add  :. 

2.  March,     (or  double-quick — March 

1190.  At  this,  the  whole  column,  except  the  di- 
recting company,  which  has  not  faced  about,  will 
step  oft";  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  eighth  bat- 
talion, placed  by  the  side  of  the  guide  of  its  now 
leading  company,  will  take  care  to  direct  this 
guide  a  little  within  the  line  of  battle. 

1191.  The  first  battalion  will  take  its  distances 
in    the  manner  indicated  No.  342,  and  following. 

1192.  The  lieutenant  colonel  of  this  battalion . 
will  throw  himself  to  the  point  at  which  the  first 
company  ought  to  be  halted,  when  the  last  com- 
pany but  one  of  the  first  battalion  shall  have  ta- 
ken its  distance. 

1193.  This  company  having  arrived  abreast 
with  the  lieutenant  colonel,  its  captain  will  halt 
it,  face  it  about,  and  align  it  by  the  left;  the 
other  companies  of  this  battalion  will  take  their 
distances  as  prescribed  for  those  of  the  first  bat- 
talion. 

1194.  Each  remaining  battalion  will  conform 
itself  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  se- 
cond. The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  eighth  will 
direct  the  march  of  its  leading  guide  to  the  point 
at  which  its  now  rearmost  company  ought  to  be 
halted,  when  he  will  change  place  with  the  major. 

1195.  The  field  officers  will  conform  them- 
selves to  what  is  prescribod  for  each,  Nos.  338- 
40. 


♦ 

4G  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

4t]i.    To  take  dlstaiicc  on  an  interior  hatfallon. 

HOG.  When  the  General  shall  wish  to  cause 
distances  to  be  taken  on  an  interior  company  of 
the  column,  say  the  first  company  of  the  fifth  bat- 
talion, he  will  establish  the  'Jirection  in  the  man- 
ner indicated  No.  118.^,  and  cause  it  to  bo  pro- 
longed to  the  front  and  rear;  which  being  exe- 
cuted, he  will  command : 

1.    On  the  first  company ,  fftli  hatfalton,  faJce 
icheeh'uf/  distance. 

1197.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  fifth  and  the  colonels  of  the  following  bat- 
talions will  each  command:  1.  Battalion,  about 
— Face;  2.  Column,  forward ;  3.  Guide  right ; 
the  colonels  of  the  battalions  in  front  of  the  fifth 
will  each  command  :  1.  Column,  Jorward;  2. 
Guide  left. 

1198.  The  General  will  then  add: 

(2.  INIarcii.     or  doiilIe-qnicJc — MARCH.) 

1109.  The  fifth  battalion,  and  those  placed  in 
its  rear,  will  execute  their  movements  in  the  man- 
ner indicated  No.  1187,  and  following,  for  taking 
distances  on  the  head  of  the  column  ;  the  fifth  will 
conform  itself  to  what  is  prescribed,  in  that  case 
for  the  first  battalion. 

1200.  The  first  four  battalions  will  execute  the 
movement  as  prescribed  No.  1176,  and  following, 
for  taking   distances    on  the  rear  of  the   column. 


ETOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE.  47 

At  the  coraniencement  of  the  movement,  the 
fourth  battalion  will  put  itself  in  march  with  the 
others^  and  its  rearmost  company  will  be  halted 
the  moment  there  is,  between  it  and  the  first  com- 
pany of  the  fifth  battalion,  a  distance  equal  to  the 
front  of  a  company,  and  twenty-two  paces. 

1201.  When  distances  are  taken  on  an  interior 
battalion  of  the  column,  the  headmost  or  rearmost 
company  of  this  battalion  will  be  designated  as 
the  directing  company. 

1202.  A  column    in  mass  will  take  full  distan- 
ces, by  the  commands  and  means  just  indicated. 
When  it  htis   to  take  half  distances,  the  General 
will  substitute,  in  the   first  command,  the  indica-  ' 
tion  half  for  that  of  ichecVing  distance. 

1203.  All  those  movements  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles,  in  a  column  left 
in  front. 

1204.  In  a  column  by  division,  distances  will 
be  taken  according  to  the  same  principles  as  in  a 
column  by  company. 

Article  X. 

Countermarcli. 

1205.  A  column,  right  in  front,  being  at  full 
or  half  distance,  when  the  General  shall  wish  to 
cause  it  to  execute  the  countermarch,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

,^  .  1.    Countermarch. 

.(  ■ 

1206.  This  being  repeated  by  all  the  colonels, 


■ib  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE.  ^ 

each   will   immediately  command  :  1.  Battalion^ 
right  (or  left)  Face  ;  2.  Bij  file  left  (or  right.) 

1207.  the  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March.     {Or  douhle-quich — March.) 

1208.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  all  the  sub-di- 
visions of  the  column  will  execute  the  counter- 
march, as  prescribed.  School  of  the  Battalion. 

1209.  With  the  left  in  front,  the  countermarch 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples. 

Countermarch  of  a  column  closed  in  mass. 

1210.  When  a  column  in  mass  has  to  execute 
the  countermarch,  the  General  will  command  : 

1.    Countermarch. 

1211.  This  being  briskly  repeated  by  all  the 
colonels,  each  will  immediately  command :  1. 
Battalion,  riyht  and  left — Face;  2.  By  file  left 
and  right. 

1212.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March — (  or  douhle-qinck — March.) 

1213.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  subdivi- 
sions will  put  themselves  in  movement,  and  the 
countermarch  will  be  executed^  as  prescribed;  No. 
354;  and  following. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  49 

Article  XL 

JBei'ig  in  column  hi/  comj)onij  cJosed  in  mass  and 
at  a  halt,  to  form  divisions, 

1214.  The  column  being  by  eompan}-,  right  in 
front  and  at  a  halt^  when  the  General  shall  wish 
to  cause  divisions  to  be  formed,  lie  will  com- 
mand :• 

1.  Form  divisions. 

1215.  This  being  repeated  by  the  colonels, 
each  will  immediately  command  :  Irft  comjyanics, 
left — Face. 

1216.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March — (or  douUc-quich — March.) 

1217.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  movement 
will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  Scliool  of  the  Bat- 
talion. 

1218.  Each  colonel  will  command  :  guides — 
Posts,  as  soon  as  the  divisions  of  his  battalion 
are  formed. 

1219.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  instead  of  at 
a  halt,  when  the  General  shall  wish  to  form  divi- 
sion.s,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Form  divisions. 

1220.  This  being  repeated  by  the  colonels,  each 
will  immediately  command  :  left  companies,  hy  the 
left  )lank. 

1221.  The  General  will  then  add  : 
5 


50  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

2.  ^Marcii  (or  double,  quick — 3Iarch.) 

1222.  At  this,  brifskly  repeated,  the  movement 
will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  School  of  the  Bat- 
talion. 

1123.  If  the  left  be  in  front,  the  General  will 

give  the  same   commands,  and  the   colonels  will 

conform  then)selvcs  to  what  is  preicribed,  No. 
882. 

PART  FOURTH. 

Different  modes  of  passim j  from  the  order  in 
column  to  the  order  in  battle. 

Article  I. 

Manner  of  determining  the  line  of  battle. 

1224.  The  different  manners  of  determining 
the  line  of  battle  have  been  explained,  School  of 
the  Battalion. 

Article  XL 

Different   modes  of  2->assing  from  column  at  full 
distance  into  line  of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  (or  right)  ^ 

2.  On  the  ris^ht  (or  left)     •   ,    r        r  .    . ,, 

o    T^  1  Vintolineor  battle. 

6.  i^orward,  { 

4.  Faced  to  the  rear.       J 

Isf.    Column  at  full  distance,  to  the  left  (or  ri^ht) 
into  line  of  battle. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINE.  51 

1225.  The  column,  right  in  front,  when  the 
General  shall  wish  to  form  it  to  the  left  into  line, 
he  will  first  assure  the  direction  of  the  i^uides  by 
one  of  the  means  prescribed,  No.  1112,  and  fol- 
lowing, and  No.  1121,  and  following ;  which  being 
executed,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel. 

1226.  This  having  been  repeated  by  the  colo- 
nels, the  right  guide  of  the  company  at  the  head 
of  each  battalion  will  throw  himself  on  the  di- 
rection of  the  left  guides,  in  conformity  with 
what  is  prescribed,  No.  391;  the  General  will 
then  add : 

2.  March,  (or  douhle-quick — March.) 

1227.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  column 
will  form  to  the  left  into  line  of  battle,  and  the 
moment  it  is  formed,  the  General  will  command  : 

3.   Guides  (or  colours  and  guides) — Posts. 

1228.  At  this,  the  guides  will  take  their  places 
in  line  of  battle,  as  also  the  colour-bearers,  if  in 
front. 

1229.  A  column  in  march,  will  be  formed  into 
line,  without  halting,  by  the  same  commands  and 
means,  and  according  to  the  principles  prescribed, 
School  of  the  Battalion. 

1230.  If,  in  forming  the  column  into  line,  the 
General  should  wash  to  move  forward,  without 
haltinc:,  he  will  command  : 


52  EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE    LINE. 

1.  By  co77}j)amcs,  left  idiccl. 

1231.  AVhich  being  repeated,  lie  will  add  ;      •: 
2.  March,  (or  clouhk-qm'ck — March.) 

1232.  At  this  comniaiid  the  movement  will  be 
executed,  as  prescribed,  No.  40-4;  and  when  the 
wheel  is  nearly  completed,  the  General  will  com- 
mand :  ! 

1.  Forward.       2.  MARCH-.       8.  Guide — centre. 

1233.  At  the  third  command  the  colour  and 
general  guides  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is 
prescribed,  for  march  in  line  of  battle. 

1234:.  A  column  left  in  front,  will  form  to  the 
right  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same 
principles. 

By  iiivcrslonj  to  the  right  (or  left^  into  line  of  hat- 
tie. 

1235.  If  circumstances  require  tliat  a  column 
right  in  front,  should  form  to  the  right  into  line 
of  battle,  the  General,  without  occupying  himself 
with  rectilyiiig  the  right  guides  of  the  column, 
will  comiiiand : 

1.  By  inversion,  right  info  line,  whocl. 

1236.  At  this,  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  the 
left  guide  of  every  company  at  the  head  of  a  bat- 


EVOLUTIONS   OF  THE   LINE.  53 

talion,  will  conform  themselves  to   what  is  pre- 
scribed, No.  408. 

1237-  The  colonels  having  repeated  the  above 
command,  will  each  immediately  give  this  :  hat- 
talion,  guide  right;  the  lieutenant-colonels  and 
majors  will  rectify,  with  the  utmost  promptitude, 
the  direction  of  the  right  guides  of  their  respec- 
tive battalions,  without  occupying  themselves  with 
the  general  direction  of  the  column  :  and  as  soon 
as  these  dispositions  are*  made,  the  General  will 
add: 

2.  March,  (or  douUc-quich — March.) 

1238.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  each  battalion 
will  wheel  up  into  line  in  conformity  to  what  is 
prescribed.  No.  409. 

1239.  The  line  being  formed,  the  General  will 
command : 

3.   Guides — Posts. 

1240.  If,  with  the  left  in  front,  it  be  necessary 
to  form  the  column  to  the  left  into  line  of  battle, 
the  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles. 

1241.  If  the  General  should  wish  the  line  to 
move  forward  after  it  is  formed,  the  movement 
will  be  executed  by  the  commands,  and  according 
to  the  principles  indicated  No.  1229;  always 
preceding  the  command,  hy  companies  right  (or 
left)  ichcel,  by  the  command,  ^y  inversion. 


54  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

Successive  Formations. 

1242.  In  the  successive  formations,  the  litu- 
tenant-colonel  of  each  subordinate  battalion  will 
always  precede  it  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  es- 
tablish a  marker  at  the  point  where  the  right  or 
left  of  his  leading  subdivision  is  to  rest.  He 
will  take  care  to  leave  between  this  marker  and 
the  next  battalion  already  established  on  the 
line,  the  interval  of  twenty-two  paces,  and  then 
place  a  second  marker  on  the  line  at  a  little  less 
than  subdivision  distance  from  the  first.  The 
moment  the  lieutenant-colonel  detaches  himself, 
he  will  be  replaced  at  the  head  of  his  column  by 
the  major. 

124o.  As  soon  as  the  color-subdivision  of  each 
battalion  arrives  on  the  line  of  battle,  the  color- 
bearer  will  step  out  and  place  himself  opposite  to 
his  file  on  the  alignment  of  the  guides  already 
established  on  that  line,  taking  care  to  hold  up 
his  lance  perpendicularly  between  his  ej^es. 

1244.  As  soon  as  there  shall  be  two  colors  on 
the  line  of  battle,  the  colonels  will  command : 
guides — Posis,  after  the  last  subdivision  of  their 
battalions  is  established  on  that  line;  but  the 
color-bearers  will  remain  in  front  until  the  entire 
line  is  formed.  The  General  will  then  command: 
colors — Posts. 

1245.  The  lieutenant-colonels  will  assure  with 
the  utmost  care  the  markers  of  their  respective 
battalions  on  the  line  of  battle,  taking  the  colors 
as  the  basis  of  aliiz-nmcnt  as  soon  as  there  are  two 


EFOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE.  55 

es'ablislied  on  that  line,  and  then  assure  Trith 
equal  precision  the  direction  of  the  following 
guides  and  color-bearer  as  they  successively  come 
on  the  line  of  battle. 

2c7.    Column  at  full  distance,  on  tlie  rirjlit  (or  Irft^ 
into  line  of  battle. 

1246.  A  column  by  company,  right  in  front^ 
being  in  march,  ^hen  the  General  shall  wish  to 
form  it  on  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  he  will 
first  determine  the  direction  cf  that  line,  and  then 
indicate  to  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  first  bat- 
talion the  point  where  the  right  is  to  rest;  this 
officer  will  immediately  detach  himself  with  two 
markers,  and  establish  them  as  indicated,  Ko. 
415. 

1247.  If  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  be 
not  parallel,  or  nearly  so,  to  that  of  the  column, 
the  Grencrah  a  little  in  advance,  will  tnke  care  to 
direct  the  m  irch  of  the  leading  subdivision  paral- 
lelly  to  that  line,  by  the  means  indicated,  No.  435, 
so  that  its  guide,  after  turning  to  the  right,  may 
have  at  least  ten  (or  nine)  paces  to  take  in  order 
to  come  upon  it. 

1248.  These"  dispositions  being  made,  the  Gen- 
eral will  command : 

On  the  right  into  line. 

1249.  This  having  been  repeated  by  the  colo- 
nels, each  will  add  :  hattalion^  guide  right. 


50  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

1250.  Tlio  leading  subdivision  having  arrived 
opposite  to  the  inark:»,r  phiced  at  the  point  of 
oj'jnii,  (rest,)  will  turn  to  the  right  and  the  for- 
mation into  line  of  battle  will  be  executed  as 
prescribed,  No.  418,  and  following. 

1251.  AVhen  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  se- 
cond battalion  sees  the  last  subdivision  of  the  first 
turn  fo  the  right,  in  order  to  move  upon  the  line, 
he  will  detach  himself  with  two  markers,  whom 
he  will  cstabli.sh  on  the  direction  of  the  guides  of 
the  first  battalion. 

1252.  The  leading  subdivision  of  the  second 
battalion  having  arrived  opposite  to  the  first 
marker,  will  turn  to  the  right  at  the  command  of 
its  captain,  who  will  halt  it  three  paces  from  the 
line  of  battle,  and  align  it  by  the  right  agains^t  the 
two  markers,  placed  in  advance  by  the  lieutenant- 
colonel. 

1258.  The  following  battalions  will  execute 
their  movement  as  just  prescribed  for  the  second. 

1254.  If  the  column  be  marchmg  in  quick 
time,  and  the  (Icneral  should  wish  the  niovement 
executed  in  double  quick  time,  he  will  add  the 
command  :  Double-quick — Marcii,  and  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  429. 

1255.  The  line  being  formed,  tlie  Greneral  will 
command : 

Colors — Posts. 

125G.  At  this  the  color-bearers  will  return  to 
their  places  in  line  of  battle.     See  Xo.  1244. 


EVOLUTIONS   OP    THE    LINE.  0/ 

1257.  The  General,  placed  at  the  point  of 
appui  will  see  that  tlie  colors  of  the  two  right 
battalions  place  themselves  correctly  on  the  direc- 
tion which  he  may  liave  determined  for  the  line 
of  battle. 

1258.  The  field  officers  will  conform  them- 
selves, pending  the  formation  into  line  of  battle 
of  their  respective  battalions,  to  what  has  been 
prescribed,  Xos.  480-1. 

1259.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  be  formed 
on  the  left,  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the 
same  principles. 

1260.  If  the  General  should  wish  to  commence 
firing  pending  the  execution  of  the  movement,  he 
will  give  an  order  to  that  efl'ect,  and  the  severa' 
battalions  will  successively  conform  themselves  t( 
what  is  prescribed,  Xo.  4o8.  Tliis  rule  is  genera- 
for  all  succcssu-e  formations. 

od.   Coliaiin  at  full  distance^  forward  into  line  o. 
hat  tie. 

1261.  "When  a  column  at  full  distance,  righti 
front,  and  in  march,  shall  arrive  behind  the  rigl 
of  the  line  on  which  it  has  to  form  line  of  battle 
the  General  will  first  determine  the  direction  o 
that  line,  and  then  indicate  to  the  lieutenant-colo 
nel  of  the  leading  battalion  the  point  at  which  thi 
right  ought  to  rest;  this  officer  will  immediately 
detach  himself  with  two  markers,  and  establish 
them   on  the   direction  indicated,  as  explained, 
No.  415. 


58  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

12G2.  The  lietul  of  the  coIuudi iiaving  arrived 
at  company  distance  from  the  line  of  Ixittle,  the! 
General  will  command : 

1.   Furicard,  into  line. 

12G3.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  first  battalion  will  command  :  hi/  company^, 
left  half  wheel;  the  other  colonels  will  each  com- 
mand:  1.  Battalion,  guide  right;  2.  Head  of 
column  to  the  left. 

1264.  The  General  will  then  add  :  ^ 

•  March,  (or  douhle-quiclc) — March. 

1265.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  first  bat- 
talion will  form  itself  forward,  into  line  of  battle 
by  the  means  prescribed,  No.  453,  and  following. 

12GG.  The-remaining  battalions  will  march  in 
column,  by  battalion,  towards  the  line  of  battle; 
to  this  end,  the  leading  company  of  each  will  break  . 
from  the  general  column  by  a  wheel  to  the  left, 
and  then  direct  itself,  that  of  the  second  battalion 
almost  pavalU'lly  to  the  line  of  battle,  and  that  of 
each  of  the  following  battalions  diagonally  for- 
ward, so  as  to  arrive  opposite  to  the  point  of  ajjjnd 
(rest)  of  its  battalion,  but  distant  from  this  point 
at  least  the  depth  of  the  battalion  in  column. 

12G7.  The  head  of  each  of  these  battalions 
having  arrived  at  this  point,  will  turn  to  the  right, 
in  order  to  advance  in  a  square  with  the  line  of 
battlc;  and  when  it  shall  beat  about  company dis- 


fv?. 


IVO.LUT.IOMS  QLTHE  LINE 


A- 


g'B' 


llll^ 


\ 


^>. 


V. 


\ 


SB^^ 


4B' 


5B^ 


ffi 


JHiic 


=  aB"^' 


ived 
the 


=  -^.' 

■^0;) 

.el- 

i. 

m- 

of 

^ 

4 

t- 

\e 

?• 

n 

fk.  \ 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE.  59 

tancc  from  that  line,  on  wlilcli  the  lieutenant-colo- 
nel will  have  established  two  niaikers,  as  explain- 
ed, No.  415,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  form  for- 
ward, into  line  of  battle  by  the  means  and  the 
commands  prescribed,  No.  452,  and  following. 

1268.  The  columns  being  at  a  halt,  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands  and 
means,  with  the  exception  that  the  captain  of  the 
leading  company,  first  battalion,  will  conform  him- 
self to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  441. 

1269.  The  line  being  formed,  the  General  will 
command :  .       . 

Colors — Posts. 

1270.  If  the  General  should  wish  to  continue 
the  march  in  line,  after  it  has  been  formed,  he  will 
not  cause  markers  to  be  established ;  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  by 
the  same  commands  and  means,  and  in  conformity 
to  what  is  indicated  No.  457 ;  when  the  line  is 
formed  the  General  will  designate  the  guide  by 
one  of  the  means  prescribed  for  marching  in  line. 

Remarks  on  Jormiiig  f or  tear  d  into  line  of  battle. 

1271.  The  precision  of  this  movement  depends 
on  the  diagonal  direction  taken  by  the  battalions 
in  passing  from  the  general  colunin  towards  the 
line  of  battle;  the  better  to  assure  this  direction, 
the  General^  colonels,  and  lieutenant  colonels,  will 
observe  the  following  rules  fo'"  executing  the  move- 
ment from  a  halt. 


60  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

1272.  Ijefore  beginning  the  movement,  the 
General  will  charge  two  aids- de-camp  to  determine 
the  points  of  appui  on  the  line  oi  battle  for  the 
right  flanks  of  the  difi'erent  battalions,  which  will 
be  executed  as  follows  :  v 

1273.  One  of  the  aids  will  gallop  to  battalion 
distance  and  twenty-two  paces  from  the  General 
placed  at  the  point  of  ajypui,  and  face  to  him ;  the 
General  will,  by  signal  of  the  sword,  align  him  on 
the  point  of  direction  to  the  left.  The  other  aid 
will  gallop  at  the  same  time  to  a  like  distance  in 

•rear  of 'the  first,  face  to  the  right,  and  align  him- 
self on  the  first  and  the  General. 

1274.  The  two  aids  being  thus  established  on 
the  line  of  b-ittle,  the  General  will  cause  the  move- 
ment to  commence  ;  the  second  battalion  will  di- 
rect itself  on  the  first  aid,  and  the  third  on  second  j 
when  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  second  will  ar- 
rive on  the  line,  the  first  will  gallop  to  battalion 
distance  and  twenty-tvro  paces  behind  the  second, 
and  align  himself  on  the  latter  and  the  color  to 
the  right;  the  two  aids  will  thus  in  turn  place 
themselves  one  behind  the  other  at  battalion  dis- 
tance and  an  interval  of  twenty-two  paces,  as  soon 
as  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  battalion  which 
directs  itself  on  cither,  comes  to  replace  him.  The 
aids-de-canip  will  be  careful  to  place  themselves 
accurately  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  at  the  true 
distance  from  each  other.  I 

1275.  From  the  commencement  of  the  move- 
ment, the  General;  or  the  ofiieer  he  may  substi- 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE.  61 

tute,  will  place  liinisclf  at  the  point  of  aprui  as  in 
the  formation  on  the  right,  into  line  of  battle,  and 
for  the  like  purpose.     >S'ee  No.  1257. 

1270.  Every  colonel  will  hold  himself  abreast 
with  his  leading  company  on  the  directing  flank, 
pending  the  march  of  his  battalion  towards  the 
line  of  battle ;  and,  when  the  battalion  begins  to 
form,  he  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed, No.  430. 

1277.  Each  lieutenant-colonel  will  detach  him- 
self, in  order  to  take  the  place  of  the  aid-de-camp 
on  the  line  of  battle,  when  the*  head  of  his  bat- 
talion is  at  about  one  hundred  and  forty  paces 
from  that  line,  and  he  will  then  discharge  the 
functions,  pending  the  formation  of  his  battalion, 
which  have  been  prescribed,  No.  431. 

1278.  A  column,  left  in  front,  arriving  behind 
the  left  of  the  line  of  battle,  will  form  forward  on 
that  line,  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inverse  means. 

\tli.    Column  at  full  distance  faced  to  the  i^ear, 
into  line  of  battle. 

1279.  A  column  at  full  distance,  right  in  front, 
and  at  a  halt,  when  the  General  shall  wish  to 
form  it  into  line  faced  to  the  rear,  he  will  first  de- 
termine the  direction  of  that  line,  and  indicate  to 
the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  headmost  battalion 
the  point  of  appid  \'ox  its  right;  this  officer  will 
immediately  detach  himself  with  two  markers,  and 

6 


62  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

establish  tlicm  on  tlic  direction-  indicated^  as  ex- 
plained, No.  415. 

1280.  The  General  will  then  cause  the  leading 
company  to  be  marched  and  aligned  against  the 
markers  in  the  manner  indicated,  No.  -±07 ;  this 

beio":  done,  he  will  then  command  : 

"-  .f 

1.  Into  line,  faced  to  the  right. 

1281.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  first  will  inimediately  command  :  haffalion, 
riqht — Face ;  the. colonels  of  the  following  bat- 
talions will  each  command:  1.  Battalion,  guide 
left  ;   2.   Head  of  column,  to  the  right. 

1282.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

]MARCir,  (or  double  quic/c — March.) 

1283.  This  being  briskly  repeated,  the  first 
battalion  will  form  into  line  of  battle,  faced  to  the 
rear,  as  prescribed.  No.  468,  and  following. 

1284.  The  remaining  battalions  will  march  in 
column,  by  battalion,  towards  the  line  of  battle; 
to  this  end,  the  leading  company  of  each  will 
break  from  the  general  column  by  a  wheel  to  the 
right,  and  the  battalion  will  then  direct  itself  to- 
wards the  line  of  battle  as  in  the  formation  for- 
icard,  iuio  line. 

1285.  The  head  of  each  of  these  battalions 
having  arrived  at  the  point  opposite  its  point  of 
appui  (rest)  of  its  battalion^  will  turn  to  the  left 


EVOLUTIONS    OF  THE    LIKE.  Oo 

in  order  to  advance  in  a  square  with  tlie  line  of 
battle;  and  when  at  about  company  distance  from 
that  line,  on  which  the  lieutenant- colonel  will 
have  established  two  markers  as  indicated,  No. 
12-12,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  form  iaced  to 
the  rear,  into  line  of  battle,  by  the  means  and 
commands  prescribed,  No.  ibO,  and  following. 
See  lYo.  1244. 

128G.  The  line  being  formed,  the  General  will 
command  : 


3.   Colors — Posts. 


12ST.  The  General,  colonels,  and  lieutenant- 
colonels,  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed. No.  1275,  and  following. 

1288.  A  column,  left  in  front,  arriving  before 
the  left  of  the  line  of  battle,  will  be  formed  faced 
to  the  rear,  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means.     . 

1289.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  shall 
arrive  in  front  of  the  right  of  the  line  on  which  it 
is  to  form,  he  will  indicate  to  the  lieutenant-colo- 
nel of  the  headmost  battalion  the  point  of  appid 
for  its  right;  this  officer  will  conform  himself  to 
what  is  prescribed.  No.  1270. 

1290.  ^yhen  the  head  of  the  column  sh;iil  be  at 
nearly  company  distance  from  the  two  markers 
established  on  the  line,  the  General  will  com- 
mand : 


64  EVOLUTIONS   OF    TUE    LINE. 

1.  Into  line,  faced  to  tlic  rear. 

1291.  This  having  been  repeated^  the  colonel 
of  the  first  will  immediately  command  :  battalioiij 
Jyy  the  right  Jlank  ;  the  colonels  of  the  other  bat- 
talions will  each  command  :  1.  Battalion,  guide 
left ;  Head  of  column  to  the  right. 

1292.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March  (or  douUe-quich — March.) 

1293.  This  being  briskly  repeated,  the  first  bat- 
talion will  form  into  line  of  battle,  faced  to  the 
rear,  as  prescribed,  No.  480,  and  following. 

1294.  The  other  battalions  will  conform  them- 
selves to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  1284,  and  fol- 
lowing. 

1295.  The  foregoing  principles  are  applicable 
to  a  column  left  in  front. 

Article  III. 

Formations  into  line  of  hattle,  composed  of  tico 
movements. 

129G.  When  a  column,  right  in  front,  arriving 
behind  the  line  of  battle,  and  'prolonging  itself  on 
that  line,  has  to  form  upon  it  before  the  whole  of 
the  colunm  has  entered  into  the  new  direction, 
the  formation  will  be  executed  as  follows. 

1297.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  General  has 
halted  the  column  at  the  instant  that  the  fourth 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    TDE    LINE.  65 

company  of  the  fourth  battalion  entered  the  new 
direction  ;  he  will  verify  the  positions  of  the  gen- 
eral guides,  who,  according  to  the  principles  es- 
tablished, ought  to  be  on  the  flank  of  the  part  of 
the  column  which  has  entered  the  new  direction, 
and  he  will  establish  this  portion  of  the  column 
on  that  direction,  by  the  means  prescribed.  No. 
1121,  and  following;  which  being  executed,  he 
will  command  : 

1.    To  the  left,  and  foricard,  into  line. 

1298.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonels 
of  the  first  four  battalions  will  each  command  : 
left  into  line,  iclieel,  and  the  colonel  of  the  fourth, 
a  part  of  whose  battalion  only  has  entered  the  new 
direction,  will  then  add:  six  last  comimnies, for- 
icard^  into  line. 

1299.  The  colonel  of  the  fifth  will  command  : 
1.  Forward,  into  line ;  2.  By  company,  left  half 
wlieel;  and  the  colonels  of  the  last  three  battalions 
will  each  command:  1.  Forward,  into  line;  2. 
Battalion,  guide  riejlit ;  Head  of  column  to  the 
left. 

1300.  The  General  will  then  add : 

2.  March  (or  donlle-quick  March.) 

1301.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  battalions 
will  form  to  the  left  and  forward,  into  line  of  hat- 
tic,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the 
two  formations. 


GG  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

1302.  If  tli«  column  bo  iu  marcli  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands  and 
means. 

1303.  If  the  General  should  wish,  in  forming 
the  linCj  to  march  it  immediately  forward^  he  will 
command : 

1.  By  compamj  to  the  left,  and  foricard  into 
line. 

1304.  This  being  repeated,  the  colonels  will 
conform  themselves  to  what  is  indicated,  Nos. 
1298-99. 

1305.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2 .   Do ulle-quich — Marcit. 

130G.  The  movement  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed. No.  1301,  and  the  General  will  designate 
the  directing  battalion  as  prescribed,  No.  1270. 

1307.  If  the  column,  instead  of  arriving  heliind, 
arrive  hcforc  the  line  of  battle,  the  formation  will 
be  executed  as  follows : 

loOS.  The  General  having  halted  the  column, 
and  assured  the  positions  of  the  guides  who  have 
entered  into  the  new  direction,  will  command  : 

1.    To  tlic  left,  and  faced  to   the  rcai',  into  line. 

1309.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonels 
of  the  lirst  four  battalions  will  each  command : 
le/t  info  the  line,  tcheel,  and  the   colonel  of  the 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINE.  G7 

fourth  will  then  add :  six  last  companies,  into  line, 
faced  to  the  rear. 

1310.  The  colonel  of  the  fifth  will  command  : 
1.  Into  line,  faced  to  the  rear ;  2.  Battalion, 
right — Face;  the  colonels  of  tlic  last  three  bat- 
talions will  each  command  :  1.  Into  line,  faced  to 
the  rear  ;  2.  Battalion,  guide  left;  3.  Head  of 
column  to  the  right. 

1311.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March  (or  double  qiiick  March.) 

1312.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  battalions 
will  form  to  the  left  and  faced  to  the  rear,  into 
line  of  hattlc,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
for  the  two  Ibrmations. 

1313.  ^Vhen  a  column  at  full  distance  has  to 
be  formed  faced  to  the  front,  or  faced  to  the  rear, 
into  line,  on  any  company  other  than  that  at  the 
head  of  tho  column,  the  formation  will  be  executed 
by  the  union  of  two  movements,  as  will  be  ex- 
plained. 

1314.  In  the  first  case,  or  faced  to  the  front: 
the  battalion  on  which  the  movement  is  made, 
and  those  in  the  rear,  will  form  f one ard,  into  line 
of  battle  ;  the  other  battalion  will  countermarch, 
and  form  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of  battle. 

1315.  In  the  second  case  :  the  column  having 
to  form  faced  to  the  rear  of  the  column,  the  bat- 
talion on  which  the  movement  is  made,  and  those 
which  follow,  will  form  faced  to  the  rear  into  line 


G8  EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINE. 

ofhaltle^  the  other  battalions  will  countermarcli, 
and  ^oxm.  for icard,  into  line  of  battle. 

13 IG.  In  both  cases  the  company  at  the  head 
of  the  battalion  on  which  the  movement  is  made, 
will  be  taken  as  the  basis  of  the  formation. 

1317.  A  column  by  company,  right  in  front, 
will  be  supposed  :  the  General  wishing  to  form  it 
into  line  of  buttle,  faced  to  the  front,  on  the  fifth 
battalion,  will  send  an  order  to  the  colonels  of  the 
first  four  battalions  to  cause  them  to  counter- 
march, and  himself  cause  to  be  established  two 
markers  before  the  head  of  the  fifth  battalion,  as 
indicated,  No.  415;  as  soon  as  those  markers  are 
established,  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  fourth 
battalion  will  place  two  others  on  the  same  align- 
ment, leaving  between  the  two  battalions  the  in- 
terval of  twentj'-two  paces. 

1318.  The  first  four  battalions  having  executed 
the  countermarch,  the  General  will  command : 

1.    On  ilie  (first  company)  fiflli  lattaVion^for- 
wavil^  into  line. 

1310.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  fifth  will  command  :  hy  company,  left  half 
wheel;  the  colonels  of  the  last  three  battalions 
will  each  command:  1.  Battalion^  guide  right; 
2.  Head  of  column  to  the  left. 

1520.  The  colonel  of  the  fourth  will  command: 
1.  Into  line,  faced  to  the  rear ;  2.  Bnttalioiiy  left — 
Face;  the  colonels  of  the  first  three  battalions 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINE.  69 

will  eacli  command  :  1.  Into  line,  faced  to  tlic 
rear;  1.  Battalion^  guide  rirjht ;  2.  Head  of  co- 
lumn to  the  left. 

lo21.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

March  for  doublc-qidcU — March.) 

1322.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  last  four 
battalions  will  form  forvxird,  and  the  first  four 
faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of  battle,  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  for  the  two  formations. 

1323.  If,  instead  of  facing  to  the  front,  the  line 
has  to  be  formed  faced  to  the  rear  of  the  column, 
the  General,  after  sending  an  order  to  the  colonels 
of  the  first  four  battalions  to  cause  them  to  coun- 
termarch, will  place  two  markers  before  the  head 
•of  the  fifth  battalion;  the  lieutenant  colonel  of 
the  fourth  will  place  two  other  markers  on  the 
same  alignment,  leaving  between  the  two  bat- 
talions an  interval  of  twenty-two  paces. 

1324.  The  first  four  battalions  having  executed 
the  countermarch,  the  General  will  command  : 

On  the  (first  company)  fifth  hatlalion,  into  line, 
fenced  to  the  rear. 

1325.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  fifth  will  command:  battalion,  right — Face; 
the  colonels  of  the  last  three  battalions  will  com- 
mand: 1.  Into  line,  faced  to  the  rear ;  2.  Bat- 
talion, guide  left;  8.  Head  of  column  to  the 
right. 


/U  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

132G.  The  colonel  of  the  fourth  will  command  : 
1.  Forward,  into  line ;   2.  Bij  company,  right  half 
wheel',  the  colonels  of  the  first  three  battalions  will  \ 
each  command:  1.  Forward,  into  line;  2.  Bat- \ 
talion,  (juide  left ;  3.  Head  of  column  to  the  riejht. 

1327.  The  General  will  then  add : 

2.  March  (or  doulle-quick — March.) 

1328.  At  tins,  briskly  repeated,  the  last  four 
battalions  will  fovm  faced  to  the  rear,  and  the  first 
four  forward,  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  for  the  two  formations. 

1329.  These  several  movements  in  a  column, 
left  in  front,  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles^  and  by  inverse  means. 

Article  IV. 

Different  modes  of  j^assing  from  cohrnin  at  half 
distance  into  line  of  battle. 

1330.  Columns  at  half  distance  ri  ay  be  formed 
into  line  of  battle  in  either  of  the  modes  prescribed 
for  columns  at  full  distanc-e.  See  commencement 
of  the  preceding  Article  II. 

Isf,    Colu7?ji  at  half  distance,  to  the  left  (or  right) 
.  into  line  of  battle. 

1331.  A  column  at  half  distance  having  to 
form  to  the  left  (or  right)  into  line  of  battlC;  the 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  71 

General  will  first  cause  it  to  take  distances  on  the 
subdivision  he  may  choose  to  des.gnate,  by  the 
means  prescribed,  No.  1174,  and  following  ;  which 
being  executed,  he  will  form  the  column  into  line 
of  battle  as  indicated,  No.  1225,  and  following. 

1332.  If  a  column  by  company,  at  half  dis- 
tmce  be  in  march,  and  it  be  necessary  to  form 
rapidly  into  line  of  battle,  the  General  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  By  tlie  rear  of  column  left  (or  rujlit)  into  line, 


1333.  This  having  been  promptly  repeated,  the 
General  will  add : 


o 


]\I.^iicii  (or  (huhle-qulch  March.) 


1334.  This  will  be  executed  by  each  battalion 
successively,  as  prescribed,  No.  503,  and  follow- 
ing j  each  colonel  will  be  careful  to  leave  the  dis- 
tance of  twenty-two  paces  between  his  own  and 
the  succeedii>§'  battalion. 

Id.   Column  at  half  distance,  on  tlie  rigid  (or  on  the 
left)  into  line  of  hattle. 

1335.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  be  formed 
on  the  right  (or  on  the  left)  into  line  of  battle,  by 
the  same  commands  and  means  as  a  column  at  full 
distance. 


72  EVOLUTIONS    OF  THE    LINE. 

od.   Column  at  half  distance,  foricard,  into  line  of 
battle. 

1336.  A  coluDin  being  at  half  distance,  when 
the  General  shall  wish  to  form  it  forward  into  line 
of  battle,  he  will  make  the  same  dispositions  and 
give  the  same  commands  as  if  the  column  were  at 
full  distance;  the  leading  battalion  will  close  in 
mass  and  deploy  on  the  headmost  company;  the 
following  battalions  will  break  by  battalion  from  the 
general  column,  and  each  direct  itself  towards  the 
line  of  battle,  as  if  it  were  at  full  distance.  When 
the  headmost  company  shall  have  arrived  at  three 
paces  from  that  line,  the  colonel  will  cause  the 
column   to  close   in  mass,  and  then   deploy  it,  as 


pre 


sen 


bed  for  the  leading'  battalion. 


AtTi.  Column  at  half  distance,  faced  to  the  rear,  into 
line  of  battle. 

1337.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  be  form- 
ed, faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of  battle,  by  the 
commands  and  means  prescribed  for  a  column  at 
full  distance. 

Article  V. 

Columns  closed  in  mass. 

Deployment  by  battalion  in  mass. 

1338.  A  column  in  mass,  whatever  the  number 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE 


atanj       mr^nm .    "^iaaiu       ttj»H»iif      qD.-*£oiiE     jp.'*.*'.'-      t. 


i\pg 


*:#t 


4    M-' 


Tv9l 


jmrutr.is         tsaxomia        nllfi'^IIUffi       •^-i     5JfTT''''TlI" 


im 


T^i 


§.  _  = 


J^V^ 


iST     =  ~ 


i^\ii  o 


.  I 


r ""  T^  fc  "'"^  °^' 


Pi?  7 


T,,6" 


Hifflui.mfinrmn    iimiijinnnwmnnnn 


iirjiuaDjmJiijl3i-i;r...j:a;.'a 


-1 


^'V^- 

--;%- 


I'U  8 


£  - 


)  line  of 


e,  when 

ntoline 

ons  and 

were  at 

lose  in 

y,  the 

oni  the 

'ds  the 

When 

I  three 

•  U  the 


•,  into 


lorm- 
the 

|n  at 

1 


3er 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  I  6 

Df  battalions,  may  be  formed  into  line  of  battle  bj 
deployment;  1st.  Faced  to  the  front;  2d.  Faced 
to  the  rear ;  3d.  Faced  to  the  left ;  4th.  Faced 
to  the  right. 

ist.  Faced  to  the  front. 

1339.  The  column,  formed  by  division,  and 
right  in  front,  and  the  General,  wishing  to  deploy 
it,  faced  to  the  front,  will  first  determine  the  di- 
rection of  the  line  of  battle,  and  cause  it  to  be 
marked  by  one  of  the  means  already  indicated, 
taking  care,  if  the  column  be  in  march,  to  cause  a 
mounted  officer  to  be  placed  on  that  line,  at  the 
point  where  the  head  of  the  column  ought  to  ar- 
rive. 

1340.  Deployments  will  always  be  made  upon 
lines  parallel  and  lines  perpendicular  to  the  line 
of  battle,  according  to  the  principle  established. 
School  of  the  Battalion.  If  the  column  be  at  a 
halt,  the  General,  before  deploying  it,  will  estab- 
lish it  perpendicularly  to  the  line  of  battle,  if  it 
be  not  already  so,  by  the  means  indicated, 
No.  1151-2,  or  No.  1164,  and  following;  if  the 
column  be  in  march,  he  will  direct  it  on  the  point, 
marked  as  above,  but  so  that  it  may  arrive  per- 
pendicularly to  the  line  of  battle,  and  he  will  halt 
it  at  three  paces  from  that  line. 

1341.  The  column  being  thus  established,  the 

General  will  cause  it  to  deploy  by  battalion  in 

mass,  on  the  first  battalion.     He  will  place  on  the 

line  of  battle  two   markers,  the   first  before  the 

7 


74  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

right  and  tlie  seeond  before  the  left  file  of  the 
headmost  division,  a.id  then  order  a  mounted  of- 
licer  to  throw  himself  beyond  the  point  at  which 
the  left  battalion  will  arrive,  and  to  plate  himself 
exactly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  basis  of  the 
alignment. 

1342.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  Ge- 
neral will  command : 

1.  By  hattalion  in  mass,  on  the  first  haUalion, 
deploy  column. 

1343.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  first  battalion  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast. 
The  other  colonels  will  face  ihcir  battalions  to 
the  lei't. 

1344.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March,     (or  douhk-quick — March.) 

1345.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeat- 
ed the  movement  will  commence;  the  colonel  of 
the  first  will  command  :  r/'(/hf — Drews;  at  which 
the  first   division  will  dress  up  against  the  mark-    f 
ers,  and  be  aligned  by  the  ri<.'ht.  '  At  the  same   | 
time,  the  guides  of  the  other  divisions  will  cover    | 
each    other    accurately    in    file,    each    following     I 
r>-uide  taking   the  distance  of  six  paces  from   the    ^ 
guide  immediately  preceding;  the  major  will  es- 
Siblish  them   promptly  on   the  direction,  and  as 
soon  as   they  are  assured   in  their  positions,  each 
chief  will   align  his   division  by  the  right.     The 
chief  of  the  first  division,  after  having  command- 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  75 

€(1  front,  instead  of  placing:  himself  before  it-j 
centre,  will  remain  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank, 
and  the  right  guide  will  I'all  back  to  the  rear 
rank. 

1346.  The  other  battalions  will  march  by  the 
left  flank ;  the  second,  which  finds  itself  nearest 
to  the  line  of  battle,  will  direct  itself  parallelly 
to  that  line  ;  the  others  will  march  abreast  with 
the  second,  and  each  preserve  the  distance  of 
nine  paces  between  the  guide  of  its  first  and  the 
guide  of  the  last  division  of  the  battulion  next  to- 
wards the  line  ot  battle. 

1347.  The  instant  the  m*ovement  commences, 
the  major  of  the  second  battalion  will  throw  him- 
self twentj^-two  paces  from  the  left  flank  of  the 
column,  to  mark  the  point  at  which  the  battalion 
will  face  to  the  right  in  order  to  advance  upon 
the  line  of  battle. 

1348.  The  lieutenant  colonel  of  this  battalion 
will  at  the  same  time  throw  himself  on  the  line 
of  battle,  and  establish  two  markers  on  it,  dis- 
posed like  those  of  the  first  battalion,  the  right 
marker  twenty-two  paces  from  the  left  flank  of  the 
battalion. 

1349.  When  the  right  file  of  the  first  division, 
second  battalion  is  nearly  up  w^ith  the  major,  the 
colonel  will  command  :  1.  Battalion,  hy  the  right 
Jianh;  2.  March;  3.   Guide  right. 

1350.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when 
the  division  has  yet  seven  or  eight  paces  to  take, 
the  second  at  the  moment  its  right  file  is  up  with 


76  EYOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 


k 


the  major;  and  the  third  immediately  after  tlie 
second. 

1351.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion 
will  face  to  the  right  (front)  in  marching,  (iSee  |m 
School  of  Comjjany  ;)  the  chiefs  of  division  will 
throw  themselves  before  the  centres  of  their  respec- 
tive divisions;  the  right  guide  of  the  first  will  so  di- 
rect himself  as  to  bring  the  right  file  opposite  to 
the  first  marker ;  and  when  the  head  of  the  bat- 
talion is  at  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle, 
the  colonel  will  halt  it,  and  command :  right — 
Dress.  At  this  command,  the  battalion  will  be 
aligned  by  the  right,  in  the  manner  prescribed  for 
the  first  battalion. 

1352.  The  other  battalion  will  continue  to 
march,  and  execute  successively  what  has  been 
indicated  for  the  second ;  the  lieutenant  colonel 
and  major  of  each  of  these  battalions  will  con- 
form themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  for  those 
of  the  second  the  moment  the  battalion  pre- 
ceding their  own  faces  to  the  right  in  order  to  ad- 
vance upon  the  line  of  battle. 

1353.  The  deployment  being  ended,  the  Gene- 
r?il  will  command : 

Guides — Posts. 

1354.  .At  this,  the  markers,  placed  before  the 
masses,  will  retire. 

1355.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  Ge- 
neral shall  wish  to  deploy  it  by  battalion  in  mass, 
on  the  first  battalion  without  halting  the  column, 


EVOLUTIONS  OF    THE    LINE, 


77 


he  will  make  the  dispositions  indicated,  No.  1339, 
and  following,  and  when  the  leading  company  of. 
the  first  battalion  is  at  company  distance  from  the 
markers  established  in  front  of  it,  the  General 
will  command : 

1.  By  hattaUon  in  mass,  on  tlie  first  Ijattalwnj 
deploy  column. 

1356.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  first  battalion  will  cause  it  to  continue  the 
inarch  to  the  front.  The  other  colonels  will  com- 
mand.    1.  Battalion,  hi/  the  left  flank. 

1857.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March,     (or  donblc-quieh — March.) 

1358.  At  this,  the  colonel  of  the  first  battalion 
will  halt  it,  and  conform  himself  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed, No.  1345  ;  the  others  will  conform  them- 
selves to  what  is  indicated.  No.  1346  and  follow- 
ing- 

1359.  If  the  General  shall  wish  to  deploy  the 
column  without  halting  it,  and  to  continue  the 
march,  the  markers  will  not  be  posted,  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands  and 
means  as  the  foregoing,  but  with  the  following 
modifications.  At  the  first  command  the  co- 
lonel of  the  first  battalion  will  command.  1. 
Guide  right.  2.  Quick  time.  At  the  command 
double  quick — March,  given  by  the  General,  the 
first  battalion  will  march  in  quick  timC;  and  take 


/8  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

the  guide  on  the  right;  the  other  battalions  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  134G,  and  fol- 
lowing, and  when  the  leading  company  of  each 
iiucccedino'  battalion  arrives  on  the  alio-nment  of 
the  first,  its  colonel  will  cause  it  to  march  in  quick 
time ;  when  the  deployment  is  ended  the  Gene- 
ral will  designate  the  directing  battalion  as  .pre- 
scribed for  marching  in  line. 

13G0.  If,  instead  of  deploying  the  column  on 
the  first  battalion,  the  General  shall  wish  to  de- 
ploy it  on  the  eighth,  he  will  begin  by  causing 
the  dispositions  prescribed,  No.  1339,  and  follow- 
ing, to  be  made,  and  then  order  a  mounted  officer 
to  throw  himself  on  the  line  of  battle  a  little  be- 
yond the  point  at  which  the  right  battalion  will 
arrive ;  this  officer  will  place  himself  exactly  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  markers  placed  before  the 
head  of  the  column. 

1361.  The  General  will  then  command  : 

1.  By  l>atta?xo%  in  masSy  on  the  eighth  battalion, 
deploy  column.  2.  March,  (or  douhlc-quich 
— March.) 

13G2.  At  the  first  command,  all  the  battalions; 
except  the  eighth,  will  face  to  the  right. 

1363.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  seven 
battalions  will  put  themselves  in  movement;  the 
first  division  of  the  first  battalion,  conducted  by 
the  lieutenant-colonel,  will  direct  itself  a  little 
within  the  line  of  battle  and  parallelly  to  that 
line  3  the  other  battalions  will  regulate  themselves 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  79 

on  the  first  in  conformity  witli  what  is  prescribed, 
No.  1346. 

1364.  At  the  instant  the  movement  commen- 
ces, the  major  of  the  seventh  will  throw  himself 
twenty-two  paces  outside  of  the  flank  of  the  co- 
lumn to  mark  the  point  at  which  the  battalion 
ought  to  be  halted. 

1365.  The  colonel  of  the  eighth,  seeing  his 
battalion  nearly  unmasked,  will  command :  1. 
Column,  forward;  2.  Guide  left;  3.  March,  (or 
douhle-quick — March.) 

1366.  At  the  command  marcli^  which  will  be 
given  the  moment  the  battalion  is  unmasked,  the 
colonel  will  conduct  it  towards  the  line  of  battle, 
and  when  at  three  paces  from  that  line,  he  will 
halt  it  and  align  it  by  the  left.  The  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  then  shift  to  the  right  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  1344. 

1367.  When  the  left  file,  first  division,  seventh 
battalion,  is  up  with  the  major,  the  colonel  of  this 
battalion  will  command:  1.  Battalion;  2.  Halt; 
3.  Front. 

1368.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion 
will  halt ;  at  the  third  it  will  face  to  the  front,  and 
if  there  be  openings  between  the  files,  they  will 
be  promptly  closed  to  the  left. 

1369.  As  soon  as  this  battalion  is  unmasked, 
the  colonel  will  conduct  it  to  the  line  of  battle  in 
the  manner  prescribed  for  the  eighth. 

1370.  The  other  battalions  will  continue  to 
march,  and   each  execute  in  succession  what  has 


80 


EVOLUTIONS  OF    THE    LINE. 


been  indicated  for  the  seventh  :  the  major  of  each 
will  throw  himself  twenty-two  paces  outside  of  the 
flank  of  the  column,  as  prescribed  for  the  major 
of  the  seventh^  at  the  moment  the  next  battalion 
in  rear  of  his  own  halts;  the  lieutenant-colonel 
will  precede  his  battalion  on  the  line  of  battle  in 
order  to  establish  upon  it  the  two  markers. 

1371.  The  movement  being  ended^  the  Gene- 
ral will  command : 

2.    Guides — Posts. 

1372.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  Ge- 
neral shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  eighth,  he 
will  make  the  dispositions  indicated,  No.  1339  ; 
and  when  the  head  of  the  column  shall  arrive 
within  three  paces  of  the  line,  he  shall  command: 

1.  Bi/  hattallon  in  mass,  on  the  eighth  hattaliov, 
deploy  column. 

1373.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  eighth  will  caution  it  to  halt,  and  will  com- 
mand, battalion.  The  colonels  of  the  other  battal- 
ions will    command,  battalion,  by  the  right  Jlanl\ 

1374.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March,     (or  doxdjle-quich — March.) 

1375.  This  being  repeated  by  all  the  colonels, 
except  the  colonel  of  the  eighth,  who  will  com- 
mand Halt,  the  first  seven,  battalions  will  face 
to  the  right,  and  the  movement  will  be  executed 
as  prescribed^  No.  1363,  and  following. 


\  EVOLUTIOXS   OF    THE    LINE.  81 

1376.  If  the  General  should  wish  to  deploy  on 
the  eighth  battalion  without  halting  the  column, 
and  to  continue  to  march  forward,  the  markers 
will  not  be  posted,  and  the  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted by  the  same  commands  and  means,  with  the 
following  modifications  :  the  eighth  battalion  when 
unmasked,  will  be  moved  forward  in  quick  time, 
and  will  continue  to  march,  instead  of  being  halt- 
ed, and  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  The 
seventh  battalion  when  unmasked  will  be  moved  to 
the  front  in  double-quick  time,  and  when  it  arrives 
on  the  alignment  of  the  eighth  it  will  take  the 
quick  step  and  dress  to  the  left,  until  the  direction 
is  given  by  the  General,  the  other  battalionj  will 
conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the 
seventh.  When  the  first  battalion  arrives  on  the 
line,  the  General  will  designate  the  directing  bat- 
talion, and  may  cause  the  line  to  take  the  double- 
quick  step. 

1377.  According  to  the  same  principles,  the 
deployment  may  be  made  on  an  interior  battalion 
of  the  column.  The  General,  after  having  estab- 
lished two  markers  before  the  head  of  the  col- 
umn, will  order  two  mounted  officers  to  throw 
themselves  respectively  a  little  beyond  the  points 
at  which  the  right  and  left  battalions  will  arrive. 

1378.  The  directing  battalion  will  conform  it- 
self to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  1365-G,  for  the 
eighth;  the  battalions  in  its  front  will  face  to  the 
right  and  be  deployed  in  the  manner  indicated, 
Nos.  1366-7,  and  No.  1367,    and  following;  the 


82  EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE. 

olher  battalions  will  face  to  the  left  and  execute 
the  movements  as  prescribed.  No.  1346,  and  fol- 
lowing. 

1379.  Those  several  movements  will  be  execut- 
ed according  to  the  same  principles  in  a  column 
with  the  le'ft  in  front. 

1380.  In  the  preceding  examples  the  line  of 
battle  has  been  established  in  front  of  the  head  of 
the  column ;  the  General  may  also  establish  it  in 
front  of  any  interior  battalion,  and  then  depio}'' 
the  column  on  this  battalion  or  any  other  that  he 
ma}^  judge  proper. 

138 i.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  line  of  bat- 
tle ought  to  be  established  in  front  of  the  sixth, 
and  that  it  is  intended  to  deploy  on  this  battali<m: 
the  Greneral  will  cause  two  markers  to  be  placed 
before  the  first  division  of  the  designated  battal- 
ion, and  order  two  mounted  officers  to  throw  them- 
selves, respectively,  a  little  be3^ond  the  points  at 
which  the  right  and  left  battalions  will  arrive;  he 
will  then  command  : 

1.  Line  of  battle  on  the  sixth  hattalion. 

1382.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  first  five 
battalions  which  are  in  front  of  the  line  of  battle, 
will  face  by  the  rear  rank ;  which  being  execut- 
ed, the  General  will  add  : 

2.  Bi/  battalion,  in  mass,  on  the  sixth  battalioji, 
deploy  column.  3.  March,  (or  donblc-qidck 
— March.) 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 


83 


1383.  At  the   second  command,  all  the   batta- 
lions, except  the  sixth,  will  face  to  the  left. 

1384.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  deployment 
will  commence  :  the  colonel  of  the  sixth  will  align 
his  battalion  by  the  left.  The  other  battalions 
will  put  themselves  in  march ;  the  direction  on 
each  side  will  be  taken  from  the  division  the 
nearest  to  the  line  of  battle,  and  the  chief  of  this 
division  will  take  care  to  direct  its  march,  paral- 
lelly  to  that  line. 

1385  At  the  instant  the  movement  commen- 
ces, the  major  of  the  fifth  will  thiow  himself 
twenty-two  paces  from  the  flank  of  the  column  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  last  division  of  his  bat- 
talion; the  lieutenant  colonel  will  throw  himself 
on  the  line  of  battle,  place  a  marker  at  the  point 
of  appid  for  the  left  of  this  battalion,  and  a  se- 
cond at  a  little  more  than  division  distance  from 
the  first,  in  ord  r  to  leave  space  for  the  battalion 
to  cross  between  them. 

1386.  When  the  left  file  of  the  last  division, 
fifth  battalion,  is  nearly  up  wiJi  the  major,  the 
colonel  will  command  (in  the  order  of  time  indi- 
cated, No.  1860  )  1.  Battalion,  hy  the  right- 
flank;  2.   March;  3.    Guide  right. 

1387.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion 
will  face  to  the  riofht  (rear)  in  marching,  in  order 
to  pass  the  line  of  battle ;  the  guide  of  the  last 
(now  leading)  division  will  so  direct  his  march  as 
to  graze,  in  passing,  the  marker  placed  at  the 
point  of  apjmi;  the  battalion  will  cross  the  line 


84 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LIXE. 


of  battle,  and  when  the  finit  division  has  passed 
it  three  paces,  the  colonel,  who  will  have  remain- 
ed in  front  of  that  line,  will  halt  the  battalion, 
and  face  it  by  the  front  rank ;  the  two  guides  of 
the  first  division  and  the  covering  sergeant  of  its. 
left  company  will  throw  themselves  out  on  the  line 
of  battle,  and  be  assured  in  their  positions  by 
the  lieutenant-colonel ;  which  being  executed,  the 
colonel  will  cause  the  battalion  to  be  aligned  by 
the  left. 

1388.  The  first  four  battalions  will  .conform 
themselves  in  succession  to  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  fifth,  and  the  last  two  will  de- 
ploy as  indicated,  No.  134G,  and  following. 

1389.  The  movement  ended,  the  General  will 
command : 

4.    Guides — Posts. 

1390.  If,  in  establishing  the  line  of  battle  on 
the  sixth,  the  General  shall  wish  to  deploy  the  co- 
lumn on  any  other,  say  the  fourth  battalion,  he 
will  command  : 

1.  Line  of  hattle,  on  the  sixth  battalion.  2.  £f/ 
battalion  in  mass,  on  the  fourth  battalion^  de- 
ploy column.  3.  March,  (or  double-quick 
MARcn.) 

1391.  This  movement  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  just  prescribed;  but  obsery- 
ing  what  follows. 


EVOLUTIOXS    OF  'TIIE    LIXE.  85 

1392.  The  markers  whom  the  General  will 
cause  to  be  established  before  the  sixth  battalion 
to  serve  as  the  basis  of  alignment,  will  be  far 
enough  apart  to  permit  the  battalion  on  which  the 
deployment  is  made  to  pass  between  them. 

1393.  At  the  first  command  the  first  five  bat- 
talions which  are  in  advance  of  the  line  of  battle, 
will  face  by  the  rear  rank. 

1394.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  three 
and  the  last  three  battalions  will  face  to  the  lel't, 
the  fifth  will  face  to  the  right,  and  the  fourth 
stand  fast. 

1895.  As  soon  as  the  fourth  battalion  is  un- 
masked, it  will  march  ;  cross  the  line  of  battle, 
and  when  the  first  division  has  passed  three  paces 
beyond,  the  colonel  will  halt  the  battalion,  face  it 
by  the  front  rank,  and  align  it  by  the  left. 

1396.  When  the  fifth  battalion  has  gained,  in 
marching  by  the  flank,  the  twenty- two  paces  which 
ought  to  separate  it  from  the  fourth,  its  colonel 
will  halt  it,  face  it  by  the  rear  rank,  and  the  mo- 
ment it  is  unmasked,  he  will  conduct  and  establish 
it  on  the  line  of  battle  as  just  prescribed  for  the 
fourth,  but  he  will  align  it  by  the  right. 

1397.  The  sixth  battalion,  marching  by  the 
flank,  will  prolong  itself  on  the  line  of  battle,  and 
will  be  halted  when  it  has  gained  the  interval  of 
twenty- two  paces,  which  ougjht  to  separate  it  from 
the  fifth. 

1398.  The  other  battalions  will  be  deployed  as 
in  the  preceding  example. 

8 


'S(j  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE   LINE.  •  ' 

2(1.  Faced  to  the  rear. 

I;:i99.  When  the  Greneral  shall  wish  to  deploy 
(    the  column   faced  to  the  rear,  he  will  cause  it  to 
execute  tne   countermarch,  and  then  deploy  it  by 
the  commands  and  means  prescribed  for  deploy- 
ing Jaced  to  the  front. 

Zd.  Faced  to  the  left. 

1400.  x\  closed  column,  right  in  front,  having 
to  deploy  by  battalion  in  mass,  faced  to  the  left, 
will  execute  the  movement  in  the  following  man- 
ner. 

1401.  Tf  it  be  the  wish  of  the  General  to  de- 
ploy the  column  on  the  fifth  battalion,  he  will  de- 
termine the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  on  the 
right  flank  of  the  column,  and  then  command  : 

1 .    To  deploy,  ficrd.   to  the  left.     2.  Bi/  battalion 
ill  mass,  on  the  fifth  hattalion,  take  distance. 

1402.  These  commands  having  been  repeated, 
tlie  colonel  of  the  fifth  will  caution  it  to  stand 
fast ;  the  coloticLs  of  the  first  four  battalions  will 
each  comumnd  :  1.  Column,  Jorivard ;  Guide 
ri(jht  ;  the  colonels  of  the  last  three  battalions 
will  each  cause  his  battalion  to  face  about,  and 
then  command:  1.  Column, forward;  2.  Guide 
h'.ft. 

1403.  The  General  will  now  add  : 

2.  March,     (or  douhle-q^idch — Maech.) 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINE.  87 

1404.  At  tliis,  briskly  repeated,  the  movement 
will  commence ;  the  lieutenant-colonels  of  the 
first  and  eighth  will  each  direct  the  headmost 
guide  of  his  battalion  parallelly  to  the  line  of  bat- 
tle. Each  subordinate  battalion  will  take  division 
distance  and  four  paces,  reckoning  i'rom  the  bat- 
talion placed  next  in  its  front  or  its  rear  towards 
the  directing  battalion.  As  each  battalion  gets 
its  distance,  it  will  be  halted  by  the  colonel,  and 
if  it  be  faced  to  the  rear  of  the  column,  ho  will 
cause  it  to  face  about. 

1405.  As  soon  as  the  movement  commences, 
the  General  will  direct  the  colonel  of  the  fifth  to 
place  two  markers  as  prescribed,  No.  307,  for 
changing  direction  by  the  right  flank  ;  the  other 
colonels,  each  as  his  battalion  gets  its  distance, 
will,  in  like  manner,  place  two  markers  on  the 
same  alignment  with  those  of  the  fifth  :  the  Ge- 
neral, or  the  officer  whom  he  may  charge  with  the 
execution  of  the  duty,  will  see  that  these  markers 
are  properly  placed. 

1406.  Distances  having  been  taken,  and  the 
markers  correctly  established,  the  General  will 
command  : 

1.  Bf/   hattaJion  in   mass,  change  direction   hj/ 
the  right  flank. 

1407.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel 
will  command  :  battalion,  rif/ht — Face. 

1408.  The  General  will  then  add : 

2.  March,     {ov  donhlc-quick — March.) 


88  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    Ll.VB. 

1409.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  eacli  battalion 
will  execute  a  change  of  direction  as  indicated, 
No.  808,  and  following,  except  that  the  battalions 
which  were,  in  the  column,  in  rear  of  the  direct- 
ing battalion,  will  be  aligned  by  the  right,  and 
tliat  the  chief  of  the  first  division  of  each  batta- 
lion will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  his  division 
after  having  aligned  it. 

1410.  The  movement  being  ended,  the  General 
^Yill  command : 

3.   Guides — Posts. 

1411.  If,  instead  of  deploying  the  column  on 
an  interior  battalion,  the  General  shall  wish  to  de- 
ploy it  on  the  first,  or  on  the  eighth,  the  movement 
will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles;  in  the 
first  case,  the  subordinate  battalions  will  conform 
themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  preceding 
example  for  those  placed  in  the  rear  of  the  direct- 
ing battalion;  and  in  the  second,  to  what  is  indi- 
cated for  those  placed  in  its  front  :  in  both  cases, 
the  directing  battalion  will  be  aligned  by  the  flank 
next  to  the  point  of  appni. 

1412.  A  column,  left  in  fi^nt,  will  be  deployed 
hy  battalion  in  mass,  faced  to  the  right,  according 
to  the  same  principles. 

4:th.  Faced  to  the  right. 

1413.  A  closed  column,  right  in  front,  having 
to  deploy  by  battalion  in  masS;  faced  to  the  right, 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE.  S9 

it  will  change  direction  by  the  left  flank,  and  then 
deploy  by  the  means  and  commands  above  indica- 
ted; but  as  this  movement  is  much  longer  than 
the  preceding  one,  the  General  may,  when  cir- 
cumstances require  it,  deploy  the  column  by  in- 
version, according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for 
deploying  faced  to  the  left,  observing  what  fol- 
lows : 

1415.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  General 
wishes  to  deploy  the  column  faced  to  the  right  on 
the  fifth  battalion  ;  he  will  determine  the  direc- 
tion of  the  line  of  battle  on  the  left  flank  of  the 
column,  and  cause  it  to  be  marked  by  the  means 
above  indicated ;  which  being  executed,  he  will 
command : 

1.  To  daploy^  hy  inversion,  Jaced  to  the  right.  2. 
Battalion  in  mass,  on  the  fifth  battalion,  take 
distance.  3.  MARCH.  (or  douhle-quick — 
March.  ) 

1416.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  1404,  and  following,  except  that  the 
colonels,  whose  battalions  are  in  front  of  the  di- 
recting battalion,  will  each  command.  1.  Co- 
lumn, forward ;  2.  Guide  left ;  and  the  colonels 
whose  battalions  are  in  its  rear  :  1.  Column,  for- 
tvard ;   2.    Guide  right, 

1417.  Each  battalion  having  taken  its  distance, 
the  General  will  command  : 

1.  By  hat  alion  in  mass,  change  direction  hy  the 
left  flanhs  2.  MAf?cii.  (or  douhle-qnick — 
March.) 


yo 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE    LINE. 


1418.  This  movement  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed,  No.  1409, 

1419.  The  deployment  being  ended,  the  Ge- 
neral will  add  : 

3.    Guides — Posts. 

1423.  The  battalions  being  thus  placed  by  in- 
version, the  masses  will  be  deployed  into  line  of 
battle  ill  the  direct  order,  when  each  battalion 
will  bo,  in  respect  to  the  others,  in  the  inverse, 
whilst  i(s  own  subdivisions  arc  in  the  direct  or- 
der. 

1421.  A  closed  column,  left  in  front,  will  be 
deployed  by  inversion  faced  to  the  left,  according 
to  the  susiic  principles. 

Defployment  of  masses. 

1422.  The  line  being  deployed  by  battalion  in 
mass,  it  is  supposed  that  the  General  wishes  to  de- 
ploy the  masses  on  the  first  division,  fifth  batta- 
lion ;  he  will  cause  two  markers  to  be  placed  be- 
fore this  division,  and  direct  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel of  the  fourth  battalion  to  place  two  others  on 
the  same  alignment  before  his  first  division. 

1423.  These  markers  being  established,  the 
lieutenant-colonels  of  the  fifth  and  fourth  batta- 
lions will  each  place  a  third  before  the  centre  of 
the  same  division,  as  prescribed  Nos.  517  and 
544. 

1424.  The  General  will,  at  the  same  time,  or- 
der two  mounted  ofiicers  to  throw  themselves  re- 


ETOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINE. 

spccfcively  a  little  beyond  the  points  at  which  will 
rest  the  left  and  the  right  of  the  line,  and  to  es- 
tablish themselves  tbere  correctly  on  the  prolon- 
gation of  the  basis  of  alignment 

1425.  These  dispositions  being  made^  the  Ge- 
neral will  command: 

1.    On  the  first   division,  fifth   battalion,   deploi/ 
masses. 

1426.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  fifth  battalion  will  caution  its  first  division 
to  stand  fast,  and  then,  with  each  of  the  colonels 
who  are  to  his  left^  command  :'  battalion,  left — 
Face. 

1427.  The  colonel  of  the  fourth  battalion,  hav- 
ing cautioned  its  last  division  to  stand  fast,  will 
then,  with  each  of  the  colonels  who  are  to  his 
right,  command  :  battalion,  rijht — Face. 

1428.  The  battalions  being  thus  by  the  flank 
their  colonels  will  phice  themselves  at  eight  or  ten 
paces  from  their  right  flanks  respectively  ;  to  this 
end,  the  colonels,  whose  battalions  have  faced  to 
the  left,  will  pass  through  the  intervals  which 
separate  these  battalions. 

1429.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March  (or  double-qidch  March.) 

14C0.  At  thi-',  briskly  repeated,  the  deploy- 
ment will  commence;  the  first  division,  first  bat- 
talion, and  the  first  of  the  eighth,  each  conduct- 


92  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

ed  by  its  lieutenant-colonel,  will  direct  its  marcli  a 
little  within  the  mounted  officer  placed  at  the  ex- 
tremity of  the  line  of  battle,  and  parallelly  to  that 
line;  the  first  division  of  each  of  the  other  bat- 
talions will  follow  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  di- 
vision which  precedes  it. 

1431.  The  fifth  and  fourth  battalions  will  de- 
ploy themselves  from  the  halt;  the  fifth  on  its 
first  division,  and  the  fourth  on  its  last  division, 
in  conformity  with  what  is  prescribed,  No.  515 
and  following,  and  No.  542,  and  following. 

1432.  The  colonel  of  the  third  battalion,  see- 
ing that  the  first  division  of  the  fourth  is  on  the 
point  of  halting,  will  for  his  last  division,  say  the 
fifth,  command  :  1.  FLftli  division.  2.  Halt. 
The  second  command  will  be  given  at  the  moment 
the  third  battalion  has  taken  its  interval  of  twen- 
ty-two paces ;  the  chief  of  the  fourth  division 
will  then  add  :  Front. 

1433.  The  lieutenant- colonel  will  detach  him- 
self in  time,  and  establish  on  the  line  of  battle 
two  markers  flicing  to  the  guides  of  the  fourth 
battalion ;  these  markers  being  established,  he 
will  place  a  third  at  the  point  against  which  one 
of  the  three  right  files  of  the  left  compmy  of  the 
directing  division  will  arrive  and  then  throw  him- 
self a  little  beyond  the  point  at  which  the  right 
of  the  third  division  will  arrive. 

1434.  The  chief  of  the  fifth  division  will 
align  it  by  the  left  against  the  markers  the  mo- 
ment it  is  unmasked. 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    TUE    LINE.  93 

1435.  The  other  divisions  will  continue  to 
march,  and  the  deployment  will  be  made  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  fourth  battalion. 

1436.  The  second  and  first  battalions  will,  suc- 
cessively, conform  themselves  to  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  third. 

1437.  The  battalions  which  march  by  the  left 
flank  will  deploy  themselves  as  follows ;  the  co- 
lonel of  the  sixth,  seeing  that  the  last  division  of 
the  fifth  battalion  is  on  the  point  of  being  halted, 
will  command ;  1.  First  division;  2.  Halt.  The 
second  command  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the 
sixth  battalion  has  taken  its  interval  of  twenty- 
two  paces ;  the  chief  of  its  first  division  will  then 
add  :  Front. 

1438.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  conform  him- 
self to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  1433,  for  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel of  the  third  battalion  ;  the  mark- 
ers whom  he  will  place  will  face  to  the  right,  and 
the  intermediate  marker  will  be  established  so  as 
to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  the 
right  compan}^,  directing  division,  of  this  batta- 
lion. 

1439.  The  first  division  having  been  faced  to 
tlie  front,  its  chief  will  align  it  by  the  right:  the 
other  divisions  will  continue  to  march,  and  the 
deployment  ended  as  just  indicated  for  the  fifth 
battalion.      See  N^u.  1287. 

1440.  The  seventh  and  eighth  battalions  will 
successively  conform  themselves  to  what  has  just 
been  prei-cribcd  for  the  sixth. 


94 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE    LINE. 


1441.  The  doplojment  being  ended;  the  Ge- 
neral will  add : 

3.  Colors — Posts. 

1442.  The  General  will  see  that  the  guides  and 
colors  of  the  fifth,  fourth,  and  sixth  battalions 
place  themselves  correctly  on  the  direction. 

1418.  The  colonels  having  halted  the  directing 
division  of  their  respective  battalions,  as  prescrib- 
ed above,  will  follow  up  the  deployment  of  the 
other  divisions;  and  in  case  a  chief  of  a  subor- 
dinate division  commits  the  fault  of  commanding 
Jialt  too  soon  or  too  late,  the}'  will  hasten  to  the 
following  division  in  order  to  prevent  the  fault 
from  being  propagated. 

1444.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  not  more 
than  three,  or  even  four  battalions,  the  General 
may  dispense  with  causing  the  intermediate  de- 
ployment by  battalion  in  mass;  in  this  case  the 
deployment  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed,  School  of  the  BattaUonj  ob- 
serving what  follows. 

14  i5.  A  column  of  four  battalions  light  in 
front,  is  supposed,  having  to  deploy  itself  on  the 
last  division  of  the  second  battalion  :  the  General, 
after  having  placed  two  markers  before  the  head- 
most division  of  the  column,  will  cause  the  line 
of  battle  to  be  prolonged  to  the  right  and  left,  and 
command  : 

1.    On  the  fifCh  division,  second  hatiallon,  deploij 
column. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINE-  95 

144G.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  second  will  caution  the  designated  division 
to  stand  fast,  and  then  command  :  bollalion,  right 

-Face. 

1447.  At  thi?,  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  this 
Lattalion  will  throw  himself  on  the  line  of  battle, 
and  place  a  third  marker  as  prescribed,  No.  544. 

1448.  The  colonel  of  the  first  buttalion  will 
give  the  same  command  as  the  colonel  of  the  se- 
cond. 

1449.  The  colonels  of  the  third  and  fourth  will 
each  command  :  hattaUon,  left — Face,  and  im- 
mediately cross  the  column,  in  order  to  place  him- 
self on  the  right  flank  of  his  battalion. 

1450.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  third  will 
throw  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  establish 
two  markers  on  this  line,  as  prescribed,  No.  1433, 
the  right  marker  at  the  distance  of  twenty-two 
paces  from  the  left  flank  of  the  second  battilion. 

1451.  The  Gei^eral  wdll  then  add  :         _  i 

2.  March  (or  thuUc-qmck — March.) 

1452.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  deploy- 
ment will  commence  :  the  second  battalion  will 
deploy  itself  on  the  designated  division  as  indi- 
cated, ^rhoolof  the  Battalion. 

1453.  The  colonel  of  the  first  will  halt  its  last 
division,  when  his  battalion  shall  have  left  be- 
tween it  and  the  right  flank  of  the  second  an  in- 
terval of  twenty-two  paoes,  and  the  battalion  will 


96  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

deploy  itself  on  this  division  as  has  already  been 
indicated. 

1454.  When  the  third  battalion  has  taken,  in 
marching  by  the  flank,  the  interval  of  twenty-two 
paces  from  the  second,  its  colonel  will  command  : 
1.  Battalion,  hy  the  right  Jhmh ;  2.  March,  (or 
(louhle-ipiick — Marcii.)     3-    Guide  right. 

1455.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion 
will  face  to  the  right  in  marching,  and  when  ar-  i 
rived  at   three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  the 
colonel  will  halt  it,  and  cause  it  to  deploy  on  its  ! 
first  division.      See  No.  1244. 

145G.  The  fourth  battalion  will  continue  to 
march ;  and  when  its  right  file  is  opposite  to  its 
point  of  appui,  the  colonel  will  conduct  it  to  the 
line  of  battle,  and  deploy  it  as  pres:-ribed  for  the 
third. 

1457.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  this  battalicn 
will  throw  himself  in  advance  on  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, and  place  the  two  markers  as  prescribed,  No. 
1450,  in  order  that  the  colonel  may  judge  the 
moment  for  marching  the  battalion  up  to  this 
line. 

1458.  The  colonels  will  conform  themselves 
pending  the  deployment  of  their  respective  bat- 
talions, to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  1443. 

1459.  The  lieutenant-colonels  will  conform 
themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  above. 

1400.  The  deployment  being  ended,  the  Gene- 
ral will  command  : 

3.  Colors — Posts. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE,  97 

1461.  These  several  modes  of  deploying  a  co- 
lumn, may  be  executed  while  marching,  by  the 
same  (generan  commands  and  means,  but  the  co 
lonels  will  conform  themselves  in  the  execution, 
to  what  is  prescribed,  School  of  the  Battalion  far 
deploywfj  icliilc  in  march, 

1462.  A  column  left  in  front  will  be  deployed 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

Movements  which  may  be,  executed  hy  a  line  o/lai- 
talioiis  in  masses. 

1st.   The  advance  in  line. 

1463.  The  line  being  deployed  by  battalion  in 
mass,  when  the  General  shall  wish  it  to  advance^ 
he  will  designate  the  directing  battalion,  (the 
fifth  will  here  be  supposed)  then  throw  himself  in 
front  of  this  battalion,  verify  the  direction  of  its 
guides  in  respect  to  their  perpendicularity  to  the 
line  of  battle,  rectify  the  direction,  if  necessary, 
and  command  : 

1.    The  Jifth,  the  hattalion  of  direction. 

1464.  At  this,  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  di- 
recting battalion  will  throw  himself  twenty-five 
or  thirty  paces  in  front  of  the  guides,  face  to 
them,  and  place  himself  correctly  on  their  pro- 
longation ;  the  General,  throwing  himself  in  rear 
of  those  guides,  will  verify  the  position  of  the 
lieutenant-colonel,  rectify  it,  if  necessary,  acd 
then  command  : 

9 


V^  EVOLUTION'S    CF  TUE    LINE. 

2 .  Ba (ta lion s,  for v:ard. 

1465.  This  liaving  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
ot*  the  directing  batta  ion  will  command  :  guide 
leftj  and  the  other  QoXoueh,  ginde  left  (or  ri^ht,) 
according  as  they  may  iind  themselves  to  the  right 
or  left  of  the  directing  battalion. 

1466.  At  this  command,  the  right  general 
guide  of  the  directing  battalion  will  throw  him- 
self six  paces  in  front  of  his  guides;  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  establish  him  on  the  perpendicular,  | 
and  as  soon  as  assured  in  that  position,  he  will 
take  points  on  the  ground  in  conformity  with 
what  is  prescribed,  No".  590. 

1467.  The  chief  of  the  first  division  in  each  of 
the  battalions  to  the  left  of  the  directing  one,  will 
])ass  to  the  left  of  his  division,  taking  post  in  the 
front  rank,  and  the  guide  of  that  flank  will  fall 
back  to  the  rear  rank. 

1468.  The  lieutenant  colonel  of  every  subordi- 
nate battalion  will  indicate  to  the  guide  of  its 
lieadmoFt  division  the  direction  he  ought  to  fol- 
low, and  this  guide  will  immediately  take  his 
points  on  the  ground. 

1461).  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  Ge- 
neral will  add : 

2.  March,     (or  douhtc-quicJc — Maucii  ) 

1470.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  line  will 
put  itself  in  movement;  the  general  guide  of  the 
directing  battalion  will  carefully  conform  himself 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  D'J 

to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  color-bearer,  No.  507  ; 
the  guide  of  its  headmost  division  will  march  ex- 
actly in  the  trace  of  the  general  guide,  preserving 
the  original  distance  of  six  paces  from  him ;  the 
guides  of  the  other  battalions  will  direct  them- 
selves perpendicularly  to  the  front. 

1471.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  each  battalion, 
being,  pending  the  inarch,  placed  by  the  side  of 
the  guide  of  his  first  division,  will  take  care  to 
maintain  between  his  battalion  and  that  next  to 
its  right  or  left,  on  the  side  of  the  direction,  the 
interval  of  twenty-two  paces. 

1472.  The  chief  of  each  first  division  will  main- 
tain himself  exactly  abreast  with  its  euide  on  the 
opposite  flank,  and  will  superintend  the  march  of 
the  division  according  to  what  is  prescribed,  No. 
004,  and  following  : 

1473.  The  other  divisions  will  conform  them- 
selves to  the  rules  for  the  march  in  column. 

1474.  The  colonels  will  hold  themselves  on  the 
flanks  of  their  respective  battalions,  each  on  the 
side  of  direction,  and  superintend  the  movement. 

2d.    To  halt  the  line,  marching  in  advance,  and  to 
\  align  it. 

1475.  The  line  being  in  inarch,  when  the  Ge- 
neral shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Battalion.    2.  Halt. 

1476.  The   line  being  halted,  if  the   General 


100  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

wish  to  give  a  general  alignment,  he  will  place  two 
markers  before  the  directing  battalion^  and  then 
command  ; 

V  1.    GuideSj  on  the  line. 

1477.  At  this,  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  each 
subordinate  battalion  will  place  two  markers  be- 
fore its  head  on  the  alignment  of  those  established 
by  the  General ;  and  the  chief  of  each  first  divi- 
sion will  pass  to  the  flank  of  his  division  on  thp 
:^ide  of  the  direction. 

1478.  As  soon  as  the  markers  are  correctly  es- 
tablished on  the  line  of  battle,  the  colonels,  with- 
out regulating  themselves  on  each  other,  will  align 
their  battalions  by  the  flank  of  direction  in  the 
manner  prescribed,  No.  1345. 

1479.  The  battalions  being  aligned,  the  Gene- 
ral will  command : 

2.    Guides — PoSTS. 

3d.    Tlie  line  marching  in  advance,  to  cause  it  to 
change  direction. 

1480.  The  line  heing  in  march,  it  is  supposed 
that  the  General  wishes  to  cause  it  to  change  di- 
rection to  the  right;  he  will  throw  hiaiself  to  the 
point  at  which  he  may  wish  the  right  of  the  new 
line  to  rest,  and  place  two  markers,  one  at  the 
point  of  arpui,  the  other  at  division  distance  from 
the  first. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  101 

1481.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  Gene- 
ral ■will  command  : 

1.    Change  dircciion  to  the  right. 

1482.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  first  battalion  will  command:  1.  Gnidt 
left;  2.  Battalion  right  ichcel ;  at  this  command, 
the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  throw  himself 
before  the  centre  of  his  division. 

1488.  The  other  colonels  will  each  command  : 
guide  right;  at  thisjcommand,  the  chief  of  each 
first  division  will   throw  himself  before  its  centre. 

1484.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March,      (or  duuhle-quicJt,  March.) 

1485.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeat- 
ed, the  first  battalion  will  change  direction  by 
wheelii  g  according  to  the  principles  prescribed, 
No.  291,  and  following;  its  colonel  will  cause  it 
10  wheel  until  its  front  is  parallel  to  the  line,  of 
battle;  he  will  then  conduct  it  forward,  halt  it 
three  paces  from  this  line^  and  align  it  by  the 
right. 

1486.  The  other  battalions  will  be  marched  to- 
wards the  line  of  battle,  each  executing  in  succes- 
sion slight  changes  of  direction  to  the  right,  so 
that,  on  arriving  at  twenty  paces  from  that  line, 
the  headmost  division  may  be  parallel  to  it ;  to 
this  end,  the  leading  guide,  advancing  insensibly 
the  left  shoulder^  will  direct  himself  circularly  to 


102  EVOLUTION?    OF   THE    LINE. 

the  right;  the  other  guides  will  follow  tliis  move- 
ment in  marching  exactly  in  his  trace,  and  the  di- 
visions will  each  conform  itself  to  the  movement 
of  its  guide  as  prescribed,  No.  195. 

1487.  At  the  commencement  of  the  movement, 
the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  second  battalion  will 
throw  himself  on  the  line  of  battl.*,  and  immedir 
ately  establish  a  marker  at  twenty-two  paces  from 
the  left  flank  of  the  first  battalion,  and  another  at 
division  distance  from  the  first,  and  at  the  instant 
of  detaching  himself,  he  will  be  replaced  at  the 
head  of  the  column  by  its  major, 

1488.  The  lieutenant-colonels  of  the  other  bat- 
talions will  successively  conform  themselves  to 
to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel of  tlie  second;  each  will  precede  his 
battalion,  on  the  line  of  battle,  by  about  fifty-five 
paces. 

1489.  The  movement  ended,  the  General  will 
add: 

3.    Guides — Posts.    . 

1490.  If  the  General  shall  wish,  in  changing, 
to  continue  the  march  in  the  new  direction,  the 
markers  will  not  be  posted,  the  movement  will  be 
executed  by  the  same  commands;  but  the  colonel 
of  the  first  bat  alien  will,  when  it  has  finished  the 
wheel  Qomm^indi,  forward  marcJi,  and  (if  the  line 
be  marching  in  double-quick  time,  he  will  add, 
ijuicJc  timr,)  thf  others  will  wheel  as  just  prescrib- 
ed in  double-quick  time,  ixud  as  each  arrives  on 


EVOLUTIONS    OP  THE    LINE.  103 

the  alignment  of  the  first,  its  colonel  will  march 
it  in  quick  time. 

1491.  Changes  of  direction  to  the  left  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inverse  means. 

Remarhs. 

1492.  It  is  essential  that  the  battalion  on  whicli 
the  movement  is  made,  should  arrive  perpcndicu- 
la  ly  to  the  line  of  battle;  to  this  end,  and  con- 
formably to  the  principle  established,  No.  295,  the 
colonel  of  this  battalion  will  cause  the  step  of  the 
pivot  to  be  shortened  if  this  should  become  neces- 
sary ;  and,  if,  notwithstanding  this  precaution, 
some  of  the  divisions  be  not  able  to  cunform  them- 
selves exactly  to  the  movement  of  the  first,  they 
will,  on  halting  the  battalion,  be  promptly  con- 
ducted by  the  flank  into  the  true  direction  before 
the  battalion  is  aligned. 

4ith.    To  march  the  line  in  retreat. 

1493.  The  line  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  Ge- 
neral shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he 

'    will  command: 

Face  hy  the  rear  rani:. 

1494.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  battalions 
v.ill  face  in  the  manner  indicated,  No.  983,  and 
=  allowing;  the  chief  of  the  last  division  of  each 


104  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

battalion  will  place  hiniself  on  the  left  of  his  di- 
vision in  the  rear  rank,  now  become  front  rank, 
and  the  chief  of  each  first  division  will  throw  him- 
self before  its  centre. 

1495.  These  dispositions  being  executed,  the 
General  will  designate  the  directing  battalion,  and 
cause  the  direction  to  be  traced  as  under  the  first 
head,  to  advance  in  Jmcj  No.  14G3,  and  then  com- 
mand : 

1.  Baftalionfi,    forivard. 

1496.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  directing  battalion  will  command  ;  (juide 
right,  and  the  colonels,  guide  left  (or  right,")  ac- 
cording as  they  may  find  themselves  to  the  left  or 
right  of  the  directing  battalion. 

1497.  The  General  will  then  add : 

2.  March,  (or  doulle-quick — March.) 

1498.  The  line  will  march  in  retreat  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  for  marching  in  ad- 
vance. 

1499.  The  line  marching  by  the  front  rank 
when  the  General  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat, 
he  will  command : 

1.  Battalions^  right  about.     2.  March. 

1500.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  battalion 
will  face  to  the  rear  and  move  off  at  the  same  gait 
by   the  rear  rank^   as  prescribed,  School  of  the 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  105 

Battalion,  the  line  will  murch  again  by  the  front 
bj  the  same  commands. 

1501.  The  General  having  halted  the  line,  and 
wi-hing  to  face   it  by  the  front  rank,  ■^^'ill  com- 


man 


Face  hj  the  front  raiiJc. 


1502.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  battal- 
ion will  face  by  the  front  rank  ;  which  being  ex- 
ecuted, the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  retake 
his  place  in  line,  and  the  chief  of  the  fourth  his  in 
column. 

Dili.    To  cliavge  direction  of  the  line  marching  in 
retreat. 

1503.  The  line  marching  in  retreat  will  change 
direction  by  the  same  means  and  commands  as  if 
it  were  advancing,  observing  what  follows. 

1504.  It  is  supposed  that  the  General  wishes 
to  change  direction  to  the  left;  he  will  place  twO 
markers  on  the  new  direction,  the  first  at  the 
point  of  appui,  and  the  second  at  such  distance 
from  the  first  that  the  battalion  may  easily  pass 
between  them. 

1505.  The  first  battalion  will  be  conducted  to 
and  established  on  the  new  direction  as  indicated. 
No.  1482,  and  14S5;  but  it  will  cross  the  line  of 
battle ;  and  when  the  first  division  has  passed 
thrco  paces  beyond,  the  colonel  will  halt  the  bat- 
talion, and  face  it  by  the  front  rank. 


lOG  EVOLUTIONS    CF    TDE    LKNE. 

150G.  As  soon  as  the  battalion  faces,  the  guides 
of  the  first  division  will  throw  themselves  on  the 
line  of  battle,  and  be  assured  in  their  positions  by 
the  lieutenant-colonel;  which  being  done,  the 
colonel  will  align  the  battalion  by  the  right. 

1507.  The  other  colonels  will  each  direct  his 
battalion  so  that  it  may  arrive  when  at  twenty 
paces,  parallelly  to  the  line  of  battle;  he  will  then 
cause  it  to  pass  that  line,  between  the  two  markers 
placed  in  advance  by  the  lieutenant-colonel  in  the 
manner  indicated,  No.  1504.  When  the  first  di- 
vision has  passed  three  paces  beyond  the  line,  the 
battalion  will  be  halted  faced  by  the  front  rank, 
and  aligned  as  prescribed  for  the  first. 

1508.  A  lino  of  battalion  masses,  left  in  front, 
■will  march  and  change  direction,  advancing  and 
retreating,  according  to  the  same  principles  and 
inverse  means;  the  fifth  or  last  division  of  each 
mass  will  conform  itself  to  what  is  prescribed  for 
the  first,  and  reciprocally. 

^th.    To  hreaJc  the    line,  formed   ly  hattalion   in 
mass,  and  to  re-/orm  the  column   into  line. 

1509.  The  line  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  Ge- 
neral shall  wish  to  break  it  to  the  right  into  co- 
lumn by  battalion,  he  will  command : 

1.  Bf/  hattalion,  right  in  front,  into  column,      , 

1510.  This  having  bren  repeated,  the  lieuten- 
ant colonel  of  each  battalion  will  place  a  marker 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE.  lO' 


before  the  left  gui.^e  of  its  first  division,  and  a 
.'rGCond  at  division  distance  from  the  first  in  a  di- 
rection perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle. 

1511.  At  the  ^ame  time,  each  colonel  ^vill  com- 
mand :  1.  Change  direction  hy  the  left  flank ;  2. 
Battalion,  left — Face. 

1512.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  G-e- 
neral  will  add  : 

2.  March  (or  double-quick — March.) 

1513.  At  this,  each  battalion  will  change  di- 
rection by  the  means  indicated,  School  of  the  Bat- 
talion; but  the  divisions  will  be  aligned  by  the 
right,  and  the  chief  of  each  first  division  will  take 
care  to  halt  it  when  its  right  file  shall  be  up  with 
the  first  marker. 

1514.  The  column  thus  formed  will  march  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  which  govern  the 
movement  of  an  ordinary  column  ;  but  as,  in  order 
to  return  into  line  of  battle,  in  the  direct  (not  in- 
verse) order,  the  battalions  must  change  direction 
by  the  right  flank,  the  column  has  been  dressed 
by  that  fl.u,nk,  an«l  will  march  with  the  guide  to 
the  right  -,  each  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  by  the 
side  of  his  hading  guide,  will  see  that  this  guide 
preserves  the  distance  (twenty-two  paces)  whicli 
separates  his  battalion  from  that  which  precedes. 

1515.  If  the  column  thus  disposed,  be  required 
to  change  direction,  as  there  are  already  sufficient 
distances  between  the  battalions,  there  will  be  no 
necessity  for  taking  distances;  each  battalion  will. 


lOO  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

successively   change   direction  according   to    tlie 
principles  prescribed,  No.  1155,  and  following. 

15 IG.  The  column  being  halted,  when  the  Ge- 
neral shall  wish  to  re-form  it  into  line  of  battle, 
faced  to  the  left,  he  will  place,  in  the  direction  he 
may  choose  to  give  to  that  line,  two  markers,  for 
the  change  of  direction  of  the  headmost  battalion 
by  the  right  flank,  and  then  command : 

1.  Faced  to  the  left  into  line.  2.  B^  hatlalion  in 
mass,  chan(je  direction  hy  the  right  Jlank.  3. 
March  (or  douhlc-quick  March.) 

1517.  The  first  command  having  been  repeat- 
ed, the  lieutenant-colonel  of  each  battalion  will 
place  two  markers  for  its  change  of  direction  ;  he 
will  establish  them  on  the  prolongation  of  those 
placed  by  the  General ;  each  colonel  will,  at  the 
same  time,  command :  hnttalion,  riglil — Face. 
At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will  be 
executed  as  prescribed,  Xo.  1409,  and  following. 

1518.  In  like  manner  may  the  same  column 
(with  distances  of  twenty-two  yaces  between  the 
battalion  masses)  be  formed  by  inversion  faced  to 
the  right  into  line  of  battle,  by  causing  each  bat- 
talion to  execute  a  change  of  direction  by  the  left 
flank.     To  efi'ect  this,  the  General  will  con-mand  : 

1.  By  inversion,  faced  to  the  right  into  line.  2. 
By  battalion  in  niass,  change  direction  by  the  left 
flank.     3.  March  (or  double  quick  March) 


ETOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINE.  109 

ItJi.   To  ploy  the  line  of  masses  into  general  co- 
lumn closed  in  mass. 

1519.  When  a  line  of  battalions  in  mass  has  to 
be  ployed  into  column,  as  the  battalions,  by  reason 
of  their  depth,  and  the  smallness  of  the  intervals 
between  them,  cannot  be  directed  diagonally  to- 
wards the  points  at  which  they  ought  respectively 
to  enter  the  column,  the  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted in  the  following  manner  : 

1520.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  line  ought 
to  be  ployed  on  the  fifth  battalion,  right  in  front; 
the  General  will  throw  himself  in  front  of  this  bat- 
talion, and  after  assuring  himself  that  the  guides 
are  correctly  placed,  he  will  command  : 

1.  JBy  battalion  in  mass,  on  the  fifth  hattalion, 
right  in  front,  into  column.  2 .  March  for  dou. 
hie-quick — March.) 

1521.  At  the  first  command,  each  colonel  who 
finds  himself  to  the  right  of  the  directing  battal- 
ion, will  command  :  1.  Column. forward ;  2.  Guide 
left. 

1522.  The  colonels,  who  are  to  the  left  of  the 
directing  battalion,  will  each  give  the  same  com- 
mands after  causing  his  battalion  to  face  about. 

1523.  At  the  command  march,  the  movement 
will  commence ;  the  first  four  battalions  will  march 
to  the  front,  and  when  the  last  division  of  the 
fourth  battalion  shall  have  passed  six  paces  be- 
yond the  first  division  of  the  fifth,  the  colonel  will 

10 


110  EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINK. 

cause  his  battalion  to  face  to  the  left,  in  marching* 
in  order  to  take  its  place  in  column  ;  when  the 
left  guides  arrive  on  the  direction  of  those  of  the 
fifth,  the  colonel  of  the  fourth  will  halt  it,  and 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  front. 

1524.  At  the  moment  of  halting,  the  left  guides 
facing  to  the  rear,  will  place  themselves  on  the 
prolongation  of  those  ot  the  fifth  battalion ;  and 
the  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  in  their  rear,  will 
assure  them  on  the  direction ;  which  being  done, 
the  colonel  will  cause  his  battalion  to  be  aligned 
by  the  left,  and  then  order  the  guides  to  face 
about. 

1525.  The  colonels  of  the  first  three  battalions 
will  each  conform  himself  to  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  tlie  colonel  of  the  Iburth,  as  his  last 
division  has  passed  six  paces  beyond  the  front 
rank,  first  divi!«ion,  of  the  battalion  which  entered 
the  column  next  before  his  own. 

1526.  The  last  three  battalions  will  enter  the 
column  in  like  manner;  the  colonel  of  the  sixth- 
will  cause  it  to  iace  to  the  left  in  inarching,  when 
its  first  division  has  passed  six  paces  beyond  the 
rear  rank,  last  division,  of  the  fifth  battalion,  and 
he  will  halt  his  battalion  when  its  left  guides  are 
on  the  direction  of  those  of  the  fifth. 

1527.  At  the  moment  of  halting,  the  guides  of 
the  sixth  will  promptly  place  themselves  on  the 
prolongation  of  those  of  the  fifth  battalion,  and 
the  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  them  on  that  di- 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINE.  Ill 

rection;  which,  being  done,  the  colonel  will  cause 
his  battalion  to  be  aligned  by  the  left. 

1528.  The  last  two  battalions  will  conform 
themselves  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  sixth,  as  the  first  division  o:  each  has  passed 
six  paces  beyond  the  rear  rank,  last  division,  of 
the  battalion  which  preceded  it  in  column. 

1529.  A  Lne  of  masses  will  be  ployed  into  co- 
lumu;  left  in  front,  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples and  by  inverse  means. 

Remarhs  on  inversions. 

1530.  The  principles  prescribed,  No.  582,  and 
following,  for  hreaJcing  or  ploying  into  column  a 
single  battalion,  formed  in  line  of  battle  by  inver- 
sion, are  applicable  to  a  line  of  many  battalions, 
when  formed  in  line  by  inversion  in  the  manner 
indicated.  No.  1236  and  following;  but  when  the 
battalions  are  placed,  in  respect  to  each  other,  in 
the  inverse  order,  whilst  their  subdivisions  are  in 
the  direct  order,  as  indicated.  No.  1420,  other 
means,  to  be  immediately  prescribed,  will  be  em- 
ployed for  breaking  or  ploying  the  line  into  co- 
lumn if  it  be  desired  to  replace  the  battalions  in 
the  direct  order. 

1531.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  General,  in 
causing  the  line  to  break,  wishes  to  march  it  to 
the  left;  he  will  order  each  colonel  to  cause  his 
battalion  to  break  to  the  right  in  order  to  march 
towards  the  left  (in  column  at  full  distance)  as  if 
it  were  isolated;  and  as  soon  as  the  battalions 


112  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

break,  he  will  put  them  in  march  all  at  the  same 
time:  ia  this  way  the  column  will  find  itself  united 
and  formed  in  the  direct  order  as  soon  as  the  last 
subdivision  of  eacn  battalion  has  turned  into  the 
new  direction. 

1532.  If,  instead  of  breaking  the  line  (into  co- 
lumn at  full  distance,)  the  General  shall  wish  to 
ploy  it  into  column,  say  on  the  fifth  battalion,  so 
that  the  first  battalion  may  be  in  front,  he  will 
order  the  colonel  of  the  fifth  to  ploy  it  into  co- 
lumn, right  in  front,  on  its  second  division ;  at 
the  same  time  he  will  order  the  other  colonels  to 
ploy  their  respective  battalions,  right  in  front,  on 
the  division  nearest  to  the  directing  battalion,  and 
then  cause  the  masses  to  enter  the  column  as  fol- 
lows :  the  first  four  battalions,  in  front,  and  the 
last  three,  in  rear  of  the  directing  battalion. 

1533.  If,  in  breaking  the  line,  it  be  desired  to 
march  towards  the  right,  or  if,  in  ploying  it,  it  De 
desired  to  place  the  eighth  battalion  in  front,  the 
movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

PART  FIFTH. 

Article  I. 

To  advance  in  line  of  battle  deployed. 

1534.  The  line  of  battalions  being  deployed, 
and  correctly  aligned  when  the  General  shall  wish 
to  advance  in  this  order,  he  will  choose  as  the  di- 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE.  113 

recting  battalion  (say  the  fifth)  the  one  which  he 
may  deem  most  favorably  placed  for  the  purpose  ; 
he  will  approach  this  battalion,  and  command : 

1.    The  fifth,  the  battalion  of  direction. 

1535.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
and  lieutenant-colonel  of  eyery  battalion  will  place 
themselves  in  rear  and  in  front  of  the  color-file  of 
their  respective  battalions  as  prescribed,  Nos. 
587-8. 

1536.  The  colonel  of  the  directing  battalion, 
having  assured  his  lieutenant-colonel  on  the  per- 
pendicular, will  promptly  establish  two  markers 
behind  his  battalion  as  prescribed,  No.  588. 

1537.  The  General  will  verify  the  direction  of 
these  markers,  rectify  it,  if  necessary,  and  charge 
an  officer  to  superintend,  pending  the  march,  the 
successive  replacing  of  them. 

1538.  The  Greneral  will  then  command  : 

Battalions,  forward. 

1539.  This  command  having  been  repeated,  the 
color-rank  of  every  battalion  will  advance  six 
pace?,  and  its  two  general  guides  will  throw  them- 
selves out  abreast  with  this  rank;  the  major  will 
place  himself  at  six  or  eight  paces  from  the  flank 
of  the  color-rank,  and  on  the  side  opposite  to  the 
directing  battalion.    . 

1540.  The  General  need  not  occupy  himself 
with  the  general  alignment  of  the  color-ranks  and 


114  EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINE. 

general  guides  of  the  different  battalions;  it. will 
suffice  if  those  of  each  battalion  conform  ihem- 
selves  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed. 

These  dispositions  having  been  made,  the  Gene- 
ral will  add : 

3.  March  (or  double-quick — March.) 

1542.  At  this,  repeated  with  the  greatest  rapid- 
ity, the  line  will  step  off  with  life;  each  battalion 
will  observe  with  the  utmost  care,  the  principles 
prescribed,  School  of  the  Battalion,  for  marching 
in  line  of  battle. 

1543.  Each  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  will 
conform  himself,  for  the  maintenance  of  the  direc- 
tion and  alignment,  to  the  principles  prescribed, 
School  of  the  Battalion. 

1544.  The  directing  battalion  being  regarded 
as  infallible  by  all  the  others,  and  having  thus  the 
greatest  influence  on  them,  its  march  will  be  su- 
perintended with  th J  utmost  care;  consequently, 
the  general-in-chief,  or  the  officer  deputed  by 
him,  placed  in  front  of  this  battalion,  will  labor  to 
maintain  its  centre  steadily  on  the  perpendicular; 
to  this  end  he  will  frequently  throw  himself  from 
thirty  to  forty  paces  in  front  of  the  color-bearer, 
face  to  the  rear,  and  align  himself  correctly  on  the 
markers  established  behind  the  battalion ;  he  will 
rectify,  if  necessary,  the  direction  of  the  centra 
corporal,  as  well  as  that  of  the  color-bearer. 

1545.  If  the  line  of  direction  of  this  battalion 
be  badly  chosen,  and  this  may  often  happen,  as  it 


ETOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE.  115 

is  very  difficult  to  determine  the  perpendicular 
with  precision/ the  General  and  the  colonel  of  this 
battalion  will  perceive  it  at  the  end  of  a  few  paces 
by  the  crowdings  in  one  wing,  and  the  openings 
of  files  in  the  other. 

1546.  If,  for  example,  the  line  of  direction,  in- 
stead of  being  perpendicular  to  the  primitive  line 
of  battle,  be  taken  to  the  right  of  the  perpendicu- 
lar, the  directing  battalion  will  soon  be  in  an  ob- 
lique position  to  both  of  those  lines ;  the  interval 
to  its  right  will  be  more  and  more  diminished,  and 
that  to  the  left  increased  in  the  same  proportion, 
which  will  force  all  the  subordinate  battalions  to 
oblique  to  the  right  to  regain  their  intervals;  the 
General,  by  placing  himself  on  either  flank  of  the 
directing  battalion,  will  perceive  that  the  battalions 
to  its  right  are  in  advance,  and  those  to  its  left  in 
the  rear,  in  respect  to  the  false  direction  of  that 
battalion. 

1547.  Promptly  to  remedy  this  fault,  the  Ge- 
neral will  order  the  major  of  the  directing  battal- 
ion to  throw  himself  thirty  or  forty  paces  before 
its  centre,  and  to  face  to  the  rear;  he  will  him- 
self go  at  the  same  time  to  a  like  distance  behind 
its  rear,  and  place,  by  signal  of  the  sword,  the  ma- 
jor on  the  direction  he  may  choose  to  give;  the 
colonel  of  this  battalion  will  immediately  caution 
the  centre  corporal  and  the  color-bearer  to  con- 
form themselves  to  this  new  direction,  and  the 
officer  superintending  the  markers  in  the  rear  will 
immediately  establish  them  on  that  direction. 


lie  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

1548.  If,  at  the  end  of  a  few  paces,  the  General 
perceive  that  the  new  direction  is  not  exact,  he 
will  promptly  give  another;  but  with  a  good  coup 
(Voeil,  and  the  habit  of  directing  lines,  he  will  rarely 
find  it  necessary  to  change  the  direction  more  than 
once. 

1549.  Each  subordinate  battalion  will  maintain 
its  interval  on  the  side  of  the  directing  battalion. 

1550.  The  preservation  of  intervals  between 
battalions  being  the  most  essential  point  in  the 
march  in  line,  the  colonels  will  give  to  it  the  ut- 
most attention. 

1551.  A  battalion  can  only  lose  its  interval,  from 
another,  by  the  false  direction  pursued  by  its  color- 
bearer.  The  colonel  may  early  perceive  this  by 
the  indications  noticed,  Nos.  1545-46,  and  as  a 
remedy,  he  will  apply  the  means  indicated,  No. 
607,  and  following. 

1552.  The  interval  may  be  momentarily  dimin- 
ished by  openings  between  files;  in  this  case,  it 
will  suffice  to  cause  the  files  to  close  insensibly 
upon  the  centre  of  their  battalion. 

1553.  The  Generals  of  the  divisions  and  bri- 
gades being  placed  further  in  rear  of  the  line  than 
the  colonels,  may  each  see  at  once  several  battal- 
ions ;  hence  it  will  be  easy  for  them  to  perceive 
whence  the  loss  of  intervals,  and  they  will  give 
prompt  notice  thereof  to  the  colonels. 

1554.  When  the  loss  of  interval  is  but  slight, 
and  the  battalion  does  not  slant  in  respect  to  the 
perpendicular,  the  colonel  may  confine  himself  to 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  117 

cautioning  the  color-bearer  to  incline  insensibly  to 
the  right  or  left,  without  taking  the  oblique  step : 
by  this  means  the  interval  may  be  re-established 
without  inconvenience.  As  to  the  general  align- 
ment, the  following  rules  will  be  observed. 

1555.  A  scrupulous  attention  need  not  be  given 
to  the  maintenance  of  the  colors  and  general 
guides  of  the  several  battalions  exactly  abreast 
with  each  other;  consequently  the  major  of  each 
battalion  placed  on  the  flank  of  his  color-rank  on 
the  side  opposite  to  the  direction,  will  not  cause 
the  color-bearer  to  shorten  or  lengthen  the  step, 
but  when  this  may  be  evidently  necessary  to  the 
preservation  of  a  certain  degree  of  general  har- 
mony. 

1556.  The  two  general  guides  of  each  battalion 
will  conform  themselves  steadily  to  the  direction 
of  the  color-rank  of  the  same  battalion,  and  hold- 
themselves  abreast  with  this  rank,  without  defer- 
ence to  the  colors  and  general  guides  of  the  other 
battalions. 

1557.  Nothing  contributes  more  to  fatigue  sol- 
diers, and  to  derange  the  inferior  order  of  battal- 
ions, than  frequent  variations  of  step ;  the  three 
corporals  placed  in  the  centre  of  each  battalion 
will  observe  steadily  the  length  and  cadence  of 
the  pace,  without  endeavoring  to  maintain  them- 
selves exactly  at  the  distance  of  six  paces  from  the 
color-rink;  consequently,  they  will  not  vary  in 
either  of  those  particulars  except  on  a  caution,  to 
that  effect;  from  their  colonel  or  lieutenant-colonel. 


118  EVOLUTIONS    Cr    THE    LINE. 

1558.  To  carry  through  the  same  principle,  co- 
lonels will  not  scrupulously  endeavor  to  maintain 
their  battalions  abreast  with  each  other;  conse- 
quently, they  will  not  cause  the  step  to  be  length- 
ened or  shortened,  the  time  to  be  marked  or  quick- 
ened, except  when  one  or  the  other  shall  evidently 
be  necessary  in  order  to  preserve  a  certain  degree 
of  harmony  in  the  line;  if  it  happen  that  a  bat- 
talion find  itself  a  pace  or  two  in  advance  or  in 
rear  of  the  neighboring  battalions,  this  slight  irreg- 
ularity may  soon  correct  itself  without  particular 
orders  or  interference, 

1559.  Colonels  will  carefully  look  to  the  direc- 
tion and  interior  order  of  their  respective  battal- 
ions, and  the  lieutenant-colonels  to  the  alignment. 

1560.  Brigadier  and  major-generals  will  super- 
intend the  march  of  their  respective  brigades  and 
divisions,  and  charge  themselves  especially  with 
the  preservation  of  battalion  intervals. 

1561.  The  General  will  occupy  himself  more 
particularly  w^ith  the  directing  battalion,  but  his 
attention  will-  at  the  same  time  be  given  to  the 
whole  line. 

Article  II. 

To  lialt  the  line  and  to  align  it. 

1562.  The  line  being  in  march,  and  the  Gene- 
ral wishing  to  halt  it,  he  will  command : 

1.  Battalions. 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE.  .         119 

1560.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  General 
will  add: 

2.  Halt. 

1564.  This  having  been  repeated  with  the  ut- 
most rapidity,  the  line  will  halt.  The  color-rank 
and  general  guides  of  each  battalion,  will  halt,  but 
remain  in  front  of  the  line. 

1565.  The  line  being  halt'  d,  and  the  General 
wishing  to  give  it  a  general  alignment,  he  will 
throw  himself  some  pices  on  the  right  of  the  di- 
recting color,  in  order  the  better  to  see  the 
whole  line,  and  thence  to  determine  the  new  di- 
rection. 

1566  He  will  next  order  the  color-bearer  and 
the  left  general  guide  of  this  battalion  to  face  to 
him,  when  he  will  place  them  on  the  direction  he 
shall  have  chosen ;  the  right  general  guide  will 
face  to  the  left,  and  align  himself  on  the  color- 
bearer  and  the  left  general  guiae  of  the  same  bat- 
talion ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  him  on 
this  direction,  and  th^  two  corporals  of  the  color- 
rank  will  fall  back  into  their  places  in  the  line  of 
battle. 

1567.  The  basis  of  alignment  being  thus  as- 
sured, the  General  will  command  : 

1.    Colors  and  general  guides  on  the  line, 

1568.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  color- 
bearers  and  general  guides  of  all  the  battalions 


120  EVOLUTIONS    OF  THE    LINE. 

will  face  to  the  color  of  the  directinf>:  battalion ; 
those  of  the  next  battalion  to  the  right  and  left, 
respectively,  will  align  themselves  correctly  on 
the  color  and  general  guides  of  that  battalion ; 
those  of  the  other  battalions  will  align  themselves 
on  the  colors;  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  of 
each  battalion  will  promptly  assure  the  color-bearer 
and  general  guides  of  their  battalions  on  the  new 
direction  :  all  the  bearers  will  carry  their  colors 
perpendicularly  between  their  eyes,  and  the  corpo- 
rals of  their  rank  will  fall  back  into  their  places 
in  line. 

1569.  These  arraBgements  being  made,  the 
General  will  add : 

2.    Guides,  on  the  line. 

1570.  This  having  been  repeated,  it  will  be  ex- 
ecuted in  conformity  with  what  is  prescribed,  No. 
642,  and  following;  and  as  soon  as  the  guides  are 
assured  on  the  line,  each  colonel  will  cause  his  bat- 
talion to  be  aligned  upon  its  centre  without  regu- 
lating itself  on  the  other  battalions. 

157  1.  All  the  battalions  being  aligned,  the  Ge- 
neral will  command : 

3.    Colors  and  guides — Posts. 

1572.  If  the  new  direction  should  throw  one  or 
more  battalions  back  from  the  position  occupied 
at  halting,  each  co  onel  of  these  battalions,  as  soon 
as  he  perceives  the  necessity  by  the  direction  of 


EVOLUTIONSOFTHE    LINE 


/ 


it.   <9 


83^ 


j-Qyi 


120 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE.  121 

the  colors,  will  face  his  battalion  about,  march  it 
to  the  rear,  and  then  face  it  about  when  it  ha?; 
passed  the  new  direction. 

Article  III. 
Change  of  direction  marching  in  line  of  hattlc. 

1573.  A  deployed  line,  marching  in  the  order 
in  battle,  when  the  General  shall  wish  to  cause  it 
to  change  direction,  so  as  to  throw  forward  a  wing, 
the  movement  will  be  executed  as  follows  : 

1574.  If  the  left  wing  be  the  one  intended  to 
be  thrown  forward,  the  General  will  go  to  tlie  right 
battalion  and  place  before  it,  on  the  new  direction 
he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  line  of  battle,  two 
markers,  distant  from  each  othe!-  fifty  or  sixty- 
paces,  the  first  marker  at  the  point  of  appui  (rest) 
for  the  right  of  the  line;  the  markers  being  estab- 
lished, he  will  cause  the  line  to  be  prolonged  by 
mounted  officars. 

1575.  These  dispositions  made,  the  General  will 
command : 

1.    Change    direction    to   ihe  r'ght.     2.    March, 
(or  double-quick — Macrh.) 

1576.  At  the  command  morch,  briskly  repeat- 
ed, the  movement  will  commence;  each  battalion 
will  change  direction  according  to  the  principlep 
prescribed,  No.  653,  and  following;  the  right  bat- 
talion will  wheel  until  it  is  parallel  to  the  new  line 
of  battle;  its  colonel  will  then  direct  it  forward, 

11 


122  EVOLUTIONS  01'   THE   IINK. 

halt  it  four  paces  within  the  markers,  and  com- 
mand :  1.  Color  and  general  guides — On  the 
[ilNE. 

1577.  The  color-bearer  and  general  guides  will 
face  to  the  General  placed  on  the  right  of  the 
line,  who  will  establish  them  on  the  new  direction; 
which  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  add :  2. 
Guides — On  THE  Line;  2.  Onthe  centre — Dress. 

1578.  As  each  battalion  has  sufficiently  disen- 
uaged  itself  by  wheeling,  its  colonel  will  add  : 
Forward — March;  at  this,  the  battalion  will  re- 
sume the  direct  march. 

1579.  The  colonel  of  the  second  battalion  will 
»>o  direct  it  as  to  cause  it  to  arrive  parallelly  to  the 
new  line;  and, to  this  end,  he  will  cause  it  to  exe- 
cute successive  slight  changes  of  direction  in  pro- 
portion as  it  advances  towards  the  line. 

1580.  Its  lieutenant-colonel  will,  in  advance, 
throw  himself  on  the  line,  and  place  upon  it  two 
markers,  as  indicated.  No.  1574. 

1581.  The  colonel  of  the  second  having  halted 
his  batralion  at  four  paces  from  the  new  line,  will 
command:  1.  Color  and  general  guides — Onthe 
Line. 

1582.  At  this,  i\\Q  color-bearer  and  two  gene- 
ral guides  of  the  «econd  battalion  will  face  to  the 
right,  and  promptly  place  themselves  on  the  line 
of  battle.  The  major,  from  the  rear  of  the  left 
general  guide,  will  align  them  correctly  on  those 
<if  the  tirst  battalion ;  which  bein^  executed;  the 


EVOLUTIONS    or   THE    LINE.  l2o 

colonel  will  add  :  2.   Guides — On  the  Line.     .'). 
On  the  centre — Dress.     See  No.  1244. 

1583.  Each  of  the  remainino;  battalions  will 
conform  itself  to  what  is  just  prescribed  for  the 
second. 

1584.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  each  battalion 
will  precede  it  on  the  line,  by  about  one  hundred 
paces,  and  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed 
for  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  second. 

1585.  The  General  or  the  officer  whom  he  may 
substitute,  placed  on  the  right  of  the  line,  will  take 
care  that  the  colors  of  the  first  two  battalions  are 
correctly  assured  on  the  new  direction  :  and  when 
the  last  battalion  is  established  on  the  line,  he  will 
command : 

Colors — Posts. 

1586.  Changes  of  direction  to  the  left,  in  order 
to  throw  forward  the  right  wing,  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

Remarks  on  changes  of  direction  ynarchiny  in  line 
of  battle. 

1587.  The  means  prescribed  for  changing  the 
direction  of  a  line  marching  in  the  order  in  battle, 
whether  to  throw  forward,  or  to  refuse  one  of  its 
wings,  give  the  facility  of  establishing  a  line  on 
any  direction  that  may  be  deemed  best,  without 
breaking  the  battalions  into  subdivisions. 


124  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

1589.  The  battalion  inarching  in  echellons,  are 
reciprocally  protec  ted ;  and  if,  before  the  end  of 
the  movement,  it  should  become  necessary  to  re- 
form the  line,  the  battalions  not  yet  on  the  new 
direction,  say  the  fifth  and  eighth  inclusive,  may 
form  themselves  into  a  full  line,  by  an  opposite 
change  of  direction  to  the  one  they  were  engaged 
in  executing.  This  line,  composed  of  the  last  four 
battalions,  would  form  an  angle  with  that  com- 
posed of  the  first  four  already  established  on  the 
new  direction. 

Article  IY. 

To  retreat  in  line  of  battle. 

1589.  The  line  being  halted,  when  the  Genera^ 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Face  to  the  rear. 

1590.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel 
will  command  :  hattalion,  about — Face,  when  the 

"line  will  face  about,  each  battalion  conforming  it- 
self to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  665. 

1591.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.    The  ( — )  the  battalion  of  direction. 

1592.  At  this,  the  colonels  and  lieutenant-colo- 
nels will  conform  themselves,  within  their  respec- 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE.  {125 

tive  battalions,  to  what  is  indicated,  No.  666,  and 
the  colonel  of  the  directing  ba  alion  will  cause 
markers  to  be  established  as  prescribed,  No.  667, 
These  dispositions  being  made,  the  General  will 
add: 

3 .  Ba ttalions,  forward. 

1593.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  color- 
rank,  the  general  guides  of  each  battalion,  the 
captains,  covering-sergeants,  and  file-closers,  will 
conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  ScJioof 
of  the  Battalion.  The  General  will  then  com- 
mand: 

4.  March,  (or  double-quick — March.) 

1594.  The  line  will  march  in  retreat  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  for  advancing  in  line 
of  battle. 

Article  Y. 
To  halt  the  line  marching  in  retreat,  and  to  align  it. 

1595.  A  deployed  line,  marching  in  retreat, 
will  be  halted  by  the  same  commands  as  a  line 
marching  in  advance;  and  when  the  General  shall 
wish  to  re-face  it,  he  will  command : 

1.  Face  to  the  front. 

1596.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel 


126  EVOLUTIONS  OP    THE  LINE. 

will  command  :  hattalion,  about — Face,  when  the 
line  will  face  about,  each  battalion  conforming  it- 
self to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  677. 

1597.  The  line  marching  by  the  front  rank,  if 
the  General  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he 
will  command  : 

1.  Battalion,  riglit  ahout. 

1598.  Which  being  promptly  repeated,  the  Ge- 
neral will  add : 

2.  March. 

1599.  At  this,  the  line  will  face  to  the  rear, 
and  move  off  at  the  same  gait  by  the  rear  rank, 
taking  care  to  conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  No. 
669,  and  following. 

Article  VI. 

Cfiange  of  direction  in  marching  in  retreat. 

1600.  A  deployed  line,  marching  in  retreat,  if 
the  General  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction 
in  order  to  refuse  the  one  or  other  wing,  he  w'ill 
cause  the  movement  to  be  executed  as  follows: 

1601.  It  will  be  supposed  that  it  is  the  left 
wing,  become  the  right,  that  the  General  wishes 
to  refuse :  he  will  pass  to  the  right  battalicn,  now 
the  left,  and  establish  two  markers  before  it  on 
the  new  direction  which  he  may  wish  to  give  to 
the  line  in  the  manner  prescribed  for  changing 


E70LUTI0NS   OF    THE    LINE,  127 

direction  in  marching  in  advance;  he  will  then 
command : 

1.    Change  direction  to  the  left. 

1602.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  General 
will  add : 

2.  March,  (or  doulle-quick — March.) 

1603.  This  briskly  repeated,  every  battalion 
will  commence  its  chang^  of  direction  recording 
to  the  principles  prescribed,  No.  681. 

1604.  The  first  battalion  will  wheel  until  it  find 
itself  parallel  to  the  markers ;  the  colonel  will  then 
march  it  forward,  cause  it  to  cross  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, and  when  the  front  rank,  now  in  the  rear,  shall 
have  passed  four  paces  beyond  this  line,  he  will 
halt  the  battalion,  face  it  about,  and  establish  iton 
the  line  by  the  commands  and  means  indicated, 
Nos.  1581-2. 

1605.  The  colonel  of  each  of  the  other  battal- 
ions will  direct  it  towards  the  line  of  battle,  as  in- 
dicated, Nos.  1578-9,  so  that  it  may  bo  parallel 
to  this  line  several  paces  before  arriving  upon  it; 
the  colonel  vv^ill  then  cause  the  battalion  to  pass 
the  line,  and  when  four  paces  beyond  it,  he  will 
halt  and  face  the  battalion  about;  he  will  then  es- 
tablish it  on  the  line  by  the  means  prescribed  for 
changing  direction  advancing. 

1606.  This  lieutenant-colonels  will  conform 
themselves  to  v^hat  is  prescribed,  Nos.  1580  and 


128  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

1584,  and  the  General  to  what  is  indicated,  No. 
1585. 

1607.  Changes  of  direction  to  the  right,  in  or- 
der to  refuse  the  rig^t  wing,  become  the  left,  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and 
by  inverse  means. 

Article   YII. 

March  in  line  of  battle  of  a  line  of  battalions  in 
columns. 

1608.  The  march  in  line  of  battle  of  a  de- 
ployed line,  presenting  many  difficulties,  parti- 
cularly if  the  ground  be  not  favourable,  it  may 
frequently  be  advantageous  to  ploy  each  battalion 
into  column,  and  to  cause  the  line  to  march  in  this 
order,  preserving,  between  every  two  battalions, 
the  interval  necessary  for  deployment. 

1609.  The  General,  wishing  to  ploy  or  to  break 
each  battalion  into  column  doubled  on  the  centre 
or  into  simple  column,  either  by  division  or  by 
company,  will  command  : 

1.  3Iovement  by   battalion. 

1610.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  General 
will  give  the  commands  of  caution  prescribed. 
School  of  the  Battalion,  for  the  particular  forma- 
tion into  column  which  he  niay  desire  to  have 
executed. 

1611.  These  commands  having  been  repeated, 
each  colonel  will  give  the  preparatory  commands 


I 


m 


m 


mi 


If  'ilV:': 


IGlfi,^     illi. 


Uk     iill 


I  "^xJlSlilllls 


Jills 


111 


JiSC, 


JG3L 


1^ 


^. 


,%-•? 


,^ 


rn 

< 
o 


Q 
2 
CO 

o 

H 
I 

rn 


I       !^ 


P3Pr^    y^r 


Syy'^ 


nil' 

lills 


yiiuy. 


'^iaC._ 


Dflar^x^||P;.-1lll| 


EVOLUTIONS   OP   THE    LINE.  129 

required   for  the  particular  movement   indicated 
by  the  General. 

1612.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

2.  March,      (or  double-quick,  March:) 

1613.  At  this,  each  battalion  will  ploy  itself 
into  column,  in  the  manner  prescribed,  Sclioolof 
the  Battalion. 

1614.  The  line  thus  formed,  will  march  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  as  a  line  of  bat- 
talions deployed,  but  observing  what  follows. 

\st.   To  cause  the  line  of  columns  to  advance. 

1615.  It  will  be  supposed  that  each  battalion 
has  been  ployed  into  double  column,  and  that  the 
General  has  chosen  the  fifth  as  the  directing  bat- 
talion :  he  will  iro  to  this  battalion,  see  whether 
the  direction  of  its  guides  be  perpendicular  to  the 
line  of  battle,  rectify  the  direction,  if  necessary, 
and  then  command  : 

1.    The  fifth,  the  battalion  of  direction. 

1616.  The  colonel  of  each  subordinate  batta- 
lion having  repeated  this  command,  will  see 
whether  his  guides  on  the  side  of  the  directing 
battalion  be  established  perpendicularly  to  the  line 
of  battle ;  if  not,  he  will  make  the  necessary  rec- 
tification, and  then  throw  himself  thirty  paces  to 
the  rear  on  the  prolongation  of  those  guides;  the 


130  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

lieutenant  colonel  will  throw  himself  a  like  dis- 
tance in  front,  and  on  the  same  perpendicular. 

1G17.  The  colonel  of  the  directing  battalion 
will  establish  in  the  rear  two  markers  on  the  pro- 
longation oK  the  guides,  as  prescribed,  No.  1536. 

1G18.  The  General  will  now  command: 

2.  Battalions,  forivard. 
1G19.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  directing  battalion  and  the  colonels  to  his 
left,  will  immediately  command  :  guide  right,  and 
the  other  colonels,  guide  left. 

1620.  At  this,  the  right  general  guide  of  each 
battalion  will  throw  himself  out  six  paces  in  front 
of  its  headmost  guide )  he  will  be  assured  on  the 
perpendicular  by  the  lieutenant-colonel,  and  im- 
mediately take  points  on  the  ground,  as  prescrib- 
ed for  the  colour-bearer,  No.  590  -,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  then  fall  back  to  the  side  of  his  head- 
most guide. 

1621.  The  chief  of  each  leading  division  will 
take  post  in  the  front  rank  of  his  division,  on  the 
flank  opposite  to  that  of  direction,  and  the  guide 
who  was  there  will  fall  back  into  the  rear  rank. 

1622.  The  major  will  place  himself  in  rear  of 
the  guides  charged  with  the  direction. 

1623.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  Gene- 
ral will  add  : 

3.  March,     (or   douUe-quith — ^March.) 

1624.  At  this,  repeated  with  the  utmost  rapidi- 
ty, the  line  will  step  off  with  life. 


EVOLUTIONS   OP  THE    LINE.  131 

1625.  The  right  general  guide  of  eoch  batta- 
lion will  direct  his  march  perpendicularly  to  the 
front,  and  the  leading  guide  will  follow  exactly  in 
his  trace. 

1626.  The  chief  of  the  leading  division  will 
maintain  himself  abreast  with  his  guide  on  the 
opposite  flank,  and  see  that  the  march  of  the  di- 
vision be  in  conformity  with  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, No.  604.  The  other  divisions  will  con- 
form themselves  to  the  rules  for  marching  in  col- 
umn. 

1627.  The  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  will 
conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos. 
168-9. 

1628.  EveTy  colonel,  placed  on  the  side  of  di- 
rection, will  superintend  the  march  of  bis  batta- 
lion in  column,  and  labor  to  preserve  its  interval. 

1629.  As  the  directing  battalion  has  to  be  re- 
garded as  infallible  by  all  the  others,  the  General 
will  attach  himself  to  it,  and  with  the  greatest 
care  maintain  the  general  guide  and  guides  of  this 
battalion  on  the  perpendicular,  according  to  tho 
principles  established,  No.  1536. 

1680.  If  the  direction  given  to  this  battalion 
has  been  badly  chosen,  the  General  will  promptly 
perceive  it  by  the  crowdings  and  openings  among 
the  files  of  the  headmost  division,  according  to 
the  side  to  which  the  guide  deviates  from  the  per- 
pendicular. Those  irregularities  although  less 
sensible  than  they  would  be  in  a  deployed  batta- 
lion, will' nevertheless  sufficiently  show  that  the 


132  EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE    LINE. 

false  direction  of  the  general  guide  ought  to.  be 
promptly  corrected. 

1631.  Colonels  of  the  subordinate  battalions 
will  look  with  so  much  the  greater  care  to  the 
preservation  of  intervals,  as  a  fault  committed  in 
this  respect  will  not  be  as  promptly  perceived  as 
in  a  deployed  line. 

1632.  In  every  battalion  the  lieutenant-colonel 
will  perform  the  duty  attributed  to  the  major. 
No.  608,  as  often  as  the  colonel  may  wish  to 
change  the  point  of  direction. 

1633.  The  line  of  battalions  in  columns  being 
in  march,  when  a  subordinate  battalion  encounters 
an  obstacle,  this  battalion  will  turn  it  in  a  manner 
so  as  to  deviate  the  least  from  the  direction  it 
ought  to  follow,  and  quicken  the  step  at  the  same 
time  as  prescribed.  No.  684,  in  order  to  return 
into  line  as  soon  as  the  obstacle  is  passed.  When 
again  in  line,  the  battalion  will  be  careful  to  re- 
establish its  interval  by  insensible  degrees. 

1634.  If  it  be  an  interior  battalion  that  has  to 
execute  the  passage  of  an  obstacle,  the  next  bat- 
talion towards  the  side  of  direction  will  take  earc 
to  keep  a  double  interval  until  the  former  batta- 
lion comes  aerain  into  line. 


^a" 


Remarks  on  the  march  of  a  line  of  battalion  col- 
umns with  deploying  intervals. 

1635.  It  has  been  supposed  above,  that  the  bat- 
talions of  the  line  were  ployed  into  double  col- 
umns; but  the  rules  just  prescribed  are  equally 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  133 

applicable  to  a  line  of  battalion  columns  formed 
in  any  other  manner. 

1635,  When  the  battalions  of  the  line  are  in 
simple  columns,  the  directing  hattulion  will  take 
the  guide  to  the  left  or  right,  according  as  it  may 
have  the  right  or  left  in  front,  and  the  subordi- 
nate battalions  will  take  the  guide  on  the  side 
next  to  the  directing  battalion. 

1637.  With  the  right  in  front,  the  right  ge- 
neral guide  in  each  battalion  will  be  charged 
with  its  direction ;  the  left  general  guide  in  the 
reverse  case. 

1638.  If  the  battalions  be  in  mass  s,  each  co- 
lonel will  hold  himself,  pending  the  march,  at 
thirty  paces  in  the  rear  of  his  battalion  oif  the 
prolongation  of  its  guides:  the  colun  ns  beiig  at 
half,  or  full  distance,  each  colonel  will  hold  him- 
self on  the  flank  of  his  column  on  the  side  of  the 
direction. 

2c?.   To   halt  the  line  of  columns  and  to  dcplo// 
it. 

1639.  A  line  of  battalions  in  col'  mns  will  be 
halted  by  the  same  commands  as  a  line  of  battal- 
ions deployed. 

1640.  The  line  being  at  a  halt,  if  it  be  the 
wish  of  the  General  to  give  a  general  alignment, 
he  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed,  No. 
1476,  and  following. 

1641.  If  the  battalions  be  in  columns  at  b&lf 
or  full  distance,  and  the  General  shall  wish  to 
deploy  them,  he  will  command. 

12 


lo4  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    IJNS. 

1.    Columns  close  in  mass.     2.  March,   (or 
double-quick — MARCH. ) 

1642.  At  the  command  ma rc/i,  each  battalion 
will  clo  e  up  on  its  loading  subdivision. 

1643.  The  line  being  halted  and  aligned,  if  it 
be  the  wish  of  the  General  to  deploy  the  batta- 
lions, and  they  are  in  double  columns,  he  will 
command  : 

1.    Deploy  columns.  2.  (ov  double-quick — March.) 

1644.  If  the  battalions  be  in  simple  columns, 
the  General  will,  in  his  first  command,  designate 
the  subdivision  on  which  each  battalion  ought  to 
deplby  itself;  if  it  be  necessary,  the  lino  may  be 
deployed  immediately  by  the  same  commands  and 
means,  the  alignment  of  the  battalion  in  mass 
being  dispensed  with. 

1645.  In  both  cases,  the  movements  will  be 
executed,  in  every  battalion,  in  the  manner  pre- 
scribed. School  of  the  Battalion. 

iid.    The  line  of  columns  marching  vi  advance,  to 
cau^ic  it  to  change  direction. 

1646.  A  line  of  battalions,  in  columns,  march- 
ing to  the  front,  and  it  being  the  wish  of  the  Ge- 
neral to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the  right, 
he  will  establish  tvvo  markers  on  the  new  line  of 
battle  in  front  of  the  position  to  be  occupied  by 
the  right  battalion ;  he  will  at  the  same  time 
charge  two  mjunted  officers  to  determine  succes- 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LIN'E.  130 

sively,  in  the  maimer  indicated,  No.  1272,  and 
following-,  the  points  at  which  the  other  hattalicnt; 
ought  respectively  to  arrive  3  these  dispositions 
made,  he  will  command  : 

1.    Chancje  direct ion  to  the  rif/ht.     2.  MARCH,  (or 
douhle-qmcJ: — MARCH.) 

1647.  The  first  command  having  been  repeat- 
ed, each  colonel  will  cause  his  battalion  to  take 
the  guide  to  the  right,  if  that  be  not  already  the 
directing  flank  ;  at  the  same  time  the  chief  of  the 
leading  division,  in  each  battalion,  will  throw 
himself  before  the  centre  of  his  division,  and  the 
general  guide,  charged  with  the  direction,  will 
retire. 

1648.  At  the  command  march,  the  colonel  of 
the  right  battalion  will  cause  it  to  change  direc- 
tion to  the  right,  and  then  direct  it  against  the 
two  markers  placed  by  the  General;  when  its 
leading  division  is  at  three  paces  from  the  mark- 
ers, the  colonel  will  halt  the  battalion  ;  if  the 
rear  divisions  have  not  yet  entered  the  new  di- 
rection, their  chiefs  will  promptly  bring  them  intt> 
it,  and  as  soon  as  they  are  established  on  it,  the 
colonel  will  align  the  battalion  by  the  right. 

1649.  Each  of  the  other  colonels  will  direct 
his  battalion  towards  the  new  line  of  battle,  so 
that  its  leading  division  may  be,  when  at  a  dis- 
tance equal  to  the  depth  of  the  column,  parallel 
to  that  line  J  to  this  end,  the  colonel  will  cause 
the  guides  of  this  division  to  advance,  insensibly 
and   successively,  the    left   shoulder ;  and   when 


136  EVOLUTIONS    or    THE    LINE. 

this  guide  has  arrived  at  three  paces  from  the 
line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  halt  the  battalion, 
and  cause  it  to  be  aligned  by  the  right. 

1650.  At  the  beginning  of  the  movement,  the 
lieutenant-coll  nel  of  the  second  battalion  will 
throw  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  replace 
the  mounted  officer  whom  the  General  had  sent 
thither;  he  will  immediately  establish  two  mark- 
ers for  the  head  of  his  battalion,  the  first  at  de- 
ploying diistance  from  the  battalion  to  the  riglit, 
and  the  second  at  division  distance  from  the  first; 
the  lieutenant-colonel  of  each  of  the  other  bat- 
talions will  throw  himself  in  like  manner  on  the 
line  of  battle,  when  the  head  of  his  battalion  is 
at  a  hundred  paces  from  this  line. 

1651.  The  last  battalion  column  being  esta- 
blished on  the  line,  the  General  will  command ; 

3.    Guides — Posts. 

1652.  Changes  of  direction  to  the  left,  will  be 
executed  accoiding  to  the  same  principles  and  by^, 
inverse  means. 

165o.  If  the  General  shall  wish  to  cause  the 
columns  to  deploy,  he  will  give  the  order  to  that 
cfiect  to  the  colonels,  who  will  cause  their  batta- 
lions to  close  up  in  halting,  and  then  dcplo}^  them. 

A:th.    To  cause  the  line  of  columns  to  marcJi  in  re- 
treat. 

1654.  A  line  of  battalions,  in   columns,  being 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  137 

halted,  wben  the  General  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
inarch  in  retreat,  lie  will  command : 

1.  Face  hy  the  rear  rank. 

1655.  This  h.-iving  been  repeated,  each  batta- 
lion will  face  by  the  rear  rank ;  the  chief  of  the 
last  division  of  each  battalion,  ^ill  place  himself 
in  the  rear  rank,  become  the  front,  on  the  side 
opposite  to  that  of  the  direction  ;  the  chief  of 
each  first  division  will  take  his  place  in  the  co- 
lumn. 

1656.  The  line  being  thus  faced  by  the  roar 
rank,  it  will  be  put  in  march  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  means  as  a  line  of  battalions  in  co- 
lumns faced  by  the  front  rank,  observ  ng  to  esta- 
blish markers  before  the  directing  battalion,  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed.  No.  667. 

1657.  The  line  marching  in  retreat,  will  con- 
form itself  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  a  line 
of  battalions,  in  columns,  marching  in  advance. 

5^/t.    To  halt  the  line  of  columns  marching  in  re- 
treat, and  to  align  it. 

1658.  The  line  marching  in  retreat  will  be 
halted  by  the  same  commands  as  if  it  were 
marching  in  advance ;  and  when  the  General 
shall  wish  to  face  it  about,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Fade  hy  the  front  rarih, 

1659.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  batta- 
lion will  be  fjiced  by  the  front  rank ;  the  chief  of 


138  EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE    LINE. 

the  first  division  in  each  will  retake  his  place"  in 
line,  and  the  chief  of  each  last  division  his  in  co- 
lumn. 

1660.  A  line  of  battalions  whether  in  columns 
or  deployed  marching  in  retreat,  when  the  Gene- 
ral shall  wish  it  to  face  to  the  front  and  halt  at 
the  same  time  he  will  command  : 

1.  Battalions,  riylit  about — Halt. 

^tli.    The  line  of  columns   marching  wi   rr treat,  to    V 
cause  it  to  clainge  direction. 

1661.  The  line,  marching  in  retreat,  will 
change  direction  by  the  same  commands  and 
means  as  if  it  marched  by  the  front  rank,  observ- 
ing what  follows. 

1662.  The  two  markers  established  by  the  Ge- 
neral before  the  position  to  be  occupied  at  halting 
by  the  first  battalion,  instead  of  being  opposite  tc 
the  right  and  left  files  respectively  of  the  leading 
division,  will  be  far  enough  apart  to  permit  this 
battalion  to  cross  the  line  of  battle  between  them, 
and  the  same  of  the  markers  established  for  the 
other  battalions. 

1663.  Each  colonel  will  direct  his  battalion  to- 
wards the  line  of  battle,  as  prescribed  for  a 
change  of  direction  forward,  and  so  that  all  its 
divisions  may  be  parallel  to  this  line  before  pass- 
ing it;  when  the  first  division,  now  in  the  rear, 
is  three  paces  beyond  the  line,  the  colonel  will 
halt  the  battalion,  and  face  it  by  the  front  rank  ; 


EVOLUTIONSOFTHE  LINE 


Pi.^  3 


B     -^ 


4B- 


PcP'  ^ 


^'-^  "■,  '~'\ 


;i3''^ 


■'''"''•"^.1%., 


!  IH 


iJMimiim^ 


mmimiiiiiiMCjM^mim^^ 


■1 


J 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 


139 


tl)e  guides  of  the  first  division  will  throw  them- 
selves on  the  line  between  the  two  markers ;  and 
soon  as  they  are  assured  in  their  positions  by 
iiie  lieutenant-colonel,  the  colonel  will  align  the 
Uattalion  by  the  right. 

1664.  The  General,  if  it  be  his  wish  to  deploy 
the  columns,  will  give  a  caution  to  that  effect  to  the 
colonels,  who,  in  halting,  will  each  cause  his  bat- 
talion to  close  up  on  its  leading  division  as  soon  as 
the  latter  has  passed  the  line  of  battle  by  a  nis- 
tance  equal  to  the  depth  of  the  column  and  three 
paces  more  ;  he  will  then  face  the  battalion  by  the 
front  rank,  and  deploy  it. 

Article  VIII. 

To  pass  a  defile  in  front. 

1665.  A  deployed  line  encountering,  in. ad- 
vancing, a  defile  which  it  has  to  pass,  will  execute 
the  movement  as  follows. 

1666.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  defile  is  op- 
posite to  the  interval  between  the  third  and  fourth 
battalions,  and  that  its  width  is  sufficient  to  give 
passage  to  the  front  of  a  company  :  the  General 
seeing  that  the  line  has  arrived  near  the  defile, 
will  halt  it,  and  command  : 

1 .  To  pass  defile  in  front,  hi/  the  right  of  the 
fourth  battalion.  2.  By  platoon  left  and  right ^ 
into  column. 

1667.  These  commands  having  been  repeated, 
the  colonels  of  the  first  three  battalions  will  each 


140  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

command  :  hy platoon^  left  icheel,  and  each  of  the 
other  colonels:  hy platoon ,  right  ichcel. 
1668.  The  General  will  then  add  : 

3.  MarciI;  (or  douhle-quick — March.) 

16G9.  At  this,  hriskly  repeated,  the  battalions 
will  break  by  platoon  to  the  left  or  right, 

1670.  The  battalions  having  broken,  the  Ge- 
neral will  cause  two  markers  to  be  placed  at  the 
points  around  which  the  two  columns  ought  to 
turn  in  order  to  enter  the  defile  ;  the  markers  will 
be  posted  a  little  more  than  the  front  of  a  com- 
pany apart.     The  General  will  then  command  : 

4.    Column,  forward. 

1671.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel, 
whose  battalion  has  broken  to  the  left,  will  com- 
mand :  guide  right,  and  each  whose  battalion  has 
broken  to  the  right,  guide  left.  The  General  will 
now  add : 

5.  March,  (or  douhle-quich — March.) 

1672.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the 
two  columns  will  march  to  meet  each  other,  and 
when  the  two  leading  platoons  have  arrived  op- 
posite to  the  respective  markers,  they  will  turn  one 
to  the  right,  and  the  other  to  the  left,  in  order  to 
unite  in  the  defile  ;  at  the  moment  of  union,  they 
will  take,  by  command  of  their  respective  chiefs. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  141 

the  platoon  on  the  right,  the  guide  to  the  left,  and 
the  left  platoon,  the  guide  to  the  right. 

1673.  The  two  united  platoons  will  march  side 
by  side,  each  regulating  itself  on  the  two  guides 
placed  elbow  to  elbow  between  them ;  these 
guides  will  direct  themselves  by  the  defile. 

1674.  The  two  next  platoons,  and,  successive- 
ly, all  the  others,  will  conform  themselves  to  what 
has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  two  leading  pla- 
toons on  coming  up  with  the  markers  placed  be- 
fore the  entrance  of  the  defile.  The  platoons  of 
the  first  battalion  (supposing  the  line  to  consist  of 
but  five)  will  march  in  simple  column  behind  the 
right  column. 

1675.  The  united  platoons  will  pass  the  defile 
iu  the  cadenced  pace,  and  with  ranks  closed, 
each  regulating  itself  on  the  two  guides  placed 
in  the  centre,  who  will  march  elbow  to  elbow  ex- 
actly in  the  traces  of,  and  at  platoon  distance 
from,  the  guides  who  immediately  precede  them. 

1676.  In  proportion  as  the  two  columns  issue 
from  the  defile,  each  captain  will  reform  his  com- 
pany as  follows:  in  the  right  column,  the  first 
platoon,  which  is  in  rear  of  the  second  of  the 
same  company,  will  oblique  to  the  right  until  it 
find  itself  unmasked,  and  then  march  forward  ; 
in  the  left  column,  it  will  be  the  second  platoon 
of  each  company,  which  will  oblique  to  the  left, 
and  then  march  up  abreast  with  its  first. 

1677.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  General,  after 
passing  the  defile,  to  re-form  line,  he  will  throw 


142 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINK. 


himself  in  advance  to  the  distance  at  which  he 
may  wish  to  establish  the  line  of  battle,  and 
place  two  markers  on  this  line  for  the  head  of  the 
right  column,  and  two  others  for  the  b.ead  of  the 
left,  leaving  the  interval  of  twenty-two  paces  be- 
tween the  two  columns. 

1678.  The  head  of  the  column  having  passed 
the  defile,  the  General  will  order  the  colonels  of 
the  third  and  fourth  battalions  to  direct  them  re- 
spectively on  the  markers  which  he  has  estab- 
lished ;  and  when  the  leading  subdivision  of  each 
of  these  battalions  has  arrived  at  three  paces 
from  the  line  of  battle,  each  colonel  will  cause  his 
battalion  to  close  in  mass  in  halting. 

1679.  The  colonels  of  the  second  and  fifth, 
will  each,  as  the  head  of  his  battalion  issues  from 
the  defile,  cause  it  to  change  direction,  the  second 
to  the  right,  and  the  fifth  to  the  left,  and  then 
direct  it  perpendicularly  towards  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, the  second,  at  twenty-two  paces  from  ihe  right 
of  the  third,  and  the  fifth,  the  same  distance 
from  the  left  of  the  fourth.  In  halting,  at  three 
paces  from  that  line,  each  battalion  will  be  closed 
in  mass  on  its  leading  company. 

1680.  Each  of  the  remaining  battalions  (what- 
ever the  number)  will  follow  the  movement  of 
the  one  that  immediately  precedes  it  in  column, 
inarch  towards  the  line,  and  establish  itself  upon 
it,  in  column,  as  just  prescribed  for  the  second 
and  fifth. 

1681.  Or,  as  soon  as  the  head  of  the  battalion 


BVOLUTIONS   or   THE    LINE-  143 

on  which  the  General  wishes  to  cause  the  de- 
ployment to  be  made,  is  Cotablished  on  the  line 
of  battle,  he  will  cause  the  movement  to  com- 
mence, and  immediately  give  notice  thereof  lo 
the  colonels  whose  battalions  are  yet  in  the  de- 
file. 

1682.  These  colonels,  as  their  battalions  suc- 
cessively issue  from  the  defile,  will  cause  them  to 
change  direction  to  the  right  and  left,  then  direct 
them  behind  the  line,  so  that  each  may  be  in  po- 
sition to  form  itself  on  the  right  or  on  the  left 
into  line  of  battle,  next  to  the  preceding  battalion 
t>f  its  column  already  in  line. 

I680.  If,  instead  of  re-establishing  the  line,  as 
in  the  pi;eceding  examples,  it  be  the  wish  of  the 
General  to  rest  one  of  the  wings,  say  the  right, 
at  the  defile,  he  will  cause  both  columns  to  take 
the  guide  to  the  right,  and  halt  them  the  instant 
that  the  last  company  of  the  right  column  issues 
from  the  defile :  this  column  may  then  be  formed 
to  the  right,  and  the  left  column  on  the  right,  into 
line  of  battle. 

1684.  If  it  be  the  left  wing  that  is  to  rest  at 
the  defile,  the  line  may  be  formed  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

Remarks  on  the  j  assage  of  defiles  in  advancing. 

1685.  The  two  columns  being  formed  by  pla- 
toon, if  the  defile  should  widen  sufficiently,  com- 
panies may  be  formed  in  each  column  without 
w  dting  till  the  head  has  issued  from  the  defile. 


144  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

1686.  When  a  sudden  narrowing  of  the  defile 
shall  oblige  the  chiefs  of  platoon  to  break  off,  for 
the  moment,  one  or  two  tiles  to  the  rear,  this  dim- 
inution of  front,  as  an  excerption  to  the  rule  es- 
tablished, will  be  made  from  the  side  opposite  to 
the  guide. 

1G87.  If  the  defile  be  of  sufficient  width  to  re- 
ceive the  front  of  a  division,  the  General,  instead 
of  causing  the  line  to  break  by  platoon,  will 
cause  it  to  break  by  company;  but,  in  this  case, 
the  company  that  is  to  lead  in  each  column,  in- 
stead of  wheeling,  will  march  forward  twice  the 
extent  of  its  front ;  and  when  the  columns  are 
put  in  movement,  these  companies  will  close  upon 
each  other,  inarching  by  the  flank,  in  order  to 
unite  at  the  entrance  of  the  defile. 

1688.  If  the  defile  be  not  of  sufficient  width 
to  receive  the  front  of  a  company,  it  will  be 
passed  in  simple  column  by  pla  oon,  right  or  left 
in  front. 

1689.  The  passage  of  defiles  to  the  front  will 
always  be  executed  by  the  subdivision  of  the 
right,  or  that  of  the  left  of  a  battalion  ;  and  when 
the  defile  happens  not  to  be  exactly  opposite  to 
an  interval  between  two  battalions,  the  leading 
subdivisions,  after  uniting,  will  direct  themselves 
diagonally  towards  the  entrance  of  the  defile. 

1690.  The  means  given,  No.  1677,  and  follow- 
ing, for  re-forming  the  line,  render  it  easy  to  es- 
tablish it  with  the  utmost  promptness,  and  on  ai; 
battalion  that  may  be  preferred.     If;  for  exan> 


EVOLUTIONS  OF    THE   LINE.  145 

pie,  the  outlet  of  tlie  defile  be  so  placed,  in  re- 
spect to  the  enemy,  as  to  render  it  necessary  to 
form  line  on  the  head  of  the  column  immediately 
after  passing ;  in  this  case,  the  General  would 
cause  the  third  and  fourth  battalions  to  close  into 
massesj  and  immediately  deploy  them ;  the  other 
battalions  would  form  on  the  kftj  and  on  the  right^ 
into  line' of  battle. 

Article  IX. 

To  pass  a  defile  in  retreat. 

1691.  The  line  marching  in  retreat,  and  en- 
countering  a  defile  which  it  has  to  pass,  the  Gen- 
eral will  cause  a  halt,  and  face  the  line  to  the 
front. 

1692.  It  will  first  be  supposed  that  the  defile 
is  opposite  to  the  interval  between  the  two  centre 
battalions,  (fourth  and  fifth,)  and  its  width  suffi- 
cient to  give  passage  to  the  front  of  a  company. 
The  General  will  cause  too  markers  to  be  placed 
at  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  behind  the  file  closers, 
in  front  of  the  defile,  and  at  a  little  more  than 
company  distance  apart,  in  order  to  indicate  to 
the  two  columns  the  points  around  which  they 
ought  to  change  direction  to  enter  the  defile; 
which  being  executed  he  will  command : 

To  the  rear,  hy  the  icings,  pass  the  defil/ 

1693.  This  having  been  repeated,  tb' 
of  the  right  battalion  of  the  line,  will 

13 


146  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

to  the  reaVy  lij  the  rujht  flanh,  pass  the  Jcfiky  and 
the  colonel  of  the  left  battalion,  to  the  rear,  hy 
the  left  f.anhyim%s  the  dffile. 

1694.  The  two  battalions  of  the  wings  will  im- 
mediately commence  the  movement  in  conformity 
with  what  is  prescribed,  No.  711,  and  foHowing; 
and  when  the  leading  platoon  of  each  column  has 
arrived  pposite  to  the  marker  placed  at  the 
point  for  changing  direction,  these  two  platoons 
will  turn  at  the  same  time,  one  to  the  left,  and 
the  other  to  the  right,  in  order  to  unite  in  the  de- 
file ;  to  this  end,  if  the  head  of  one  of  the  col- 
umns arrive  before  the  other,  it  will  wait  for  the 
head  of  the  corresponding  battalion,  before  turn- 
ing. As  soon  as  the  two  platoons  unite,  th oy  will 
take,  by  command  of  their  respective  chicf'^ — the 
platoon,  now  on  the  left,  the  guide  to  tlie  ri<:ht, 
and  the  other,  the  guide  to  the  left;  the  rciuain- 
ing  platoons  of  these  two  battalions  will  succes- 
sively conform  themselves  to  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  those  of  the  head,  and  the  two 
columns  will  thus  march  together  accoMling  to 
the  principles  indicated,  No.  1673,  and  iullow- 
ing,  for  the  passage  of  a  defile  in  front. 

1695.  The  other  battalions  will  successively 
execute  the  same  movement;  the  colonel  of  each 
will  give  one  of  the  commands  proticribed,  No. 
169H,  according  as  his  battalion  hns  to  pass  the 
defile  by  the  right  or  left  flank,  and  so  that  its 
leading  platoon  may  follow,  at  the  desired  dis- 
tance, the  rearmost  platoon   of  the  battalion  im- 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    TUE    LINE.  147 

mediately  preceding ;  the  battalions  will  enter 
the  defile,  side  by  side,  as  prescribed,  for  the  two 
battalions  of  the  wings. 

169G.  If  the  defile  become  of  sufiflcient  width 
to  give  passage  to  a  division  marching  by  the 
front,  each  captain,  as  his  platoon  successively 
enter  the  enlarged  width,  will  cause  them  to 
form  company  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed. No.  1G76,  otherwise  this  movement  will 
only  be  executed  as  each  company  issues  from 
the  defile. 

1697.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  General,  after 
passing,  to  re-form  line  facing  to  the  defile,  he 
will  throw  himself  in  advance  to  the  distance  at 
which  he  may  wish  to  establish  the  new  line  of 
battle,  and  determine  its  direction  by  establish- 
ing, for  the  head  of  the  column,  two  markers, 
distant  from  each  other  a  little  more  than  the 
front  of  a  division  ;  he  will  then  cause  this  line 
to  be  prolonged  to  the  right  and  left  by  mounted 
officers. 

169<S.  The  head  of  the  column  will  be  so  di- 
rected as  to  cross  the  line  of  battle  between  the 
two  markers  placed  by  the  General ;  and  when 
four  paces  beyond,  the  column,  composed  of  the 
right  battalions,  will  take  the  guide  to  the  left, 
and  turn  to  the  left;  the  column,  composed  of 
the  left  battalions,  will  take  the  guide  to  the 
right,  and  turn  to  the  right;  the  two  columns 
will  thus  prolong  their  march,  in  opposite  direc- 
tions, parallelly  to   the  line  of  battle,  on  which 


148  EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINl. 

the  colours  apd  general  guides  will  throw  them- 
selves. 

1699.  Each  column  will  be  halted  soon  after 
its  last  subdivision  has  entered  the  new  direction, 
and  so  that,  on  re-forming  line,  the  two  battalions 
which  were  the  rearmost,  may  find  themselves 
separated  by  the  interval  of  twenty-two  paces. 
One  of  the  two  columns  will  be  made  to  coun- 
termarch, and  the  General,  having  rectified,  if 
necessary,  the  general  direction,  will  cause  the. 
column  to  lorm  to  the  left  or  to  the  rights  into  line 
of  battle. 

1700.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  General,  instead 
of  placing  four  battalions  to  the  left  of  the  defile^ 
as  in  the  last  example,  to  place  only  three  on  that 
side,  and  to  throw  the  other  five  to  the  right,  the 
movement  will  be  executed  in  the  following  man- 
ner. 

1701.  The  last  three  battalions,  which  are  to 
be  formed  to  the  left  of  the  defile,  will  be  halted 
as  soon  as  the  leading  subdivision  of  the  eighth 
battalion  arrives  at  company  distance  from  the 
point  of  appui  for  the  left  of  the  line,  and  will 
be  formed  to  the  right j  into  line  of  battle. 

1702.  The  fifth  battalion,  instead  of  following 
the  movement  of  the  last  three,  will  continue  to 
march  straight  forward  after  havinji;  cro.ssed  the 
line  of  battle,  and  close  in  mass  as  soon  as  its 
leading;  subdivision  has  left  between  it  and  the 
line  the  necessary  space  to  contain  the  battalion 
in  mass. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE 


^y  vr 


1';^' 


r^r 


21'. 


IB' 


TPmro  •r[]-^:KFB^:B 


4  B'''-  cffliiiinMraiitiiL      ^  "p,'' 


rTTruf 


r 


IB"" 


II' 


5  B'' 


2  B^ 


.1  yv 


r=     H  I  ( i  1 1 1    1 1 11  i  H  i 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE   LINE. 


14^ 


•  1703.  The  last  subdivision  having  closed,  this 
battalion  will  be  made  to  countermarch,  and  then 
to  deploy,  so  that  its  left  may  find  itself  twenty- 
two  paces  from  the  right  of  the  sixth. 

1704.  The  column  composed  of  the  right  bat- 
talions will  continue  to  march,  and  when  its  lasfc 
subdivision  has  passed  a  distance  equal  to  the 
front  of  a  company  beyond  the  point  of  appui 
for  the  left  of  the  fourth  battalion,  the  major 
general  in  command  of  this,  particular  column 
{See  No,  1008,)  will  halt  it,  cause  it  to  counter- 
march, and  after  having  assured  the  direction  of 
its  guides  on  the  colours  of  the  battalions  already 
established,  he  will  cause  it  to  form  to  the  righty 
into  line  of  hatth. 

1705.  The  defile,  in  the  preceding  examples 
has  been  supposed  to  be  behind  the  centre  of  the 
line  composed  of  an  even  number  of  battalions; 
but  it  may  frequently  be  otherwise.  For  in- 
stance ;  it  may  be,  that  there  are  five  battalions 
on  the  right,  and  only  three  on  the  left  side  of 
the  defile.  In  this  case,  the  General  would  first 
send  an  order  to  the  colonels  of  the  first  and 
second  battalions  to  pass  the  defile  in  simple 
column  in  advance,  and  then,  seizing  the  proper 
time,  give  the  command  indicated,  No.  1692,  so 
that  there  may  be  no  interruption  in  the  move- 
ment. So,  if  the  line  present  an  odd  number  of 
battalions,  a  similar  course  would  be  pursued  in 
respect  to  the  odd  battalion  on  the  right  or  left 
of  the  defile. 


150  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

1706.  When  the  defile  happens  to  be  behind 
the  right  or  left  battalion  of  the  line,  the  Gener*^^ 
■will  cause  it  to  pass  by  a  single  wing :  to  this 
end,  he  will  substitute,  in  his  command,  the  in 
dication  hi/  the  left  loing  or  hy  the  rif/ht  ichuj 
for  that  of  hi/  the  wings.  The  movement  will 
commence  by  the  wing  the  farthest  from  the  defile, 
so  that  the  battalion  opposite  to  it  may  be  the  last  ^| 
to  enter.  ; 

Artice  X.  ' 

Changes  of  front. 


Perpendicular  changes  of  front. 

\si.   Changes  of  Jront  forward. 

(^Movement  of  the  first  line.) 

1707.  A  line  being  deployed,  and  the  General 
wishing  to  cause  it  to  change  front  on  the  right, 
he  will  first  determine  the  direction  of  the  new 
line  of  battle,  cause  two  markers  to  be  placed  on 
it  before  the  position  to  be  occupied  by  the  right 
company,  first  battalion,  and  immediately  cause 
this  company  to  be  established  against  those 
markers;  he  will  at  the  same  time  charge  two 
mounted  ofiicers  to  determine  successively  the 
points  on  the  line  at  which  the  subordinate  bat- 
talions ought  respectively  to  arrive,  as  indicated, 


EVOLUTIONS  or  THE  LINE 


/'/  8 


-■^ 


i 


m 


■jiMLipii-.miiimm    tpnduLmcjipnifeBinmnfpn    "'"TfiPfiff^f^tff''?fi?'T 


4^i 


.J'^?' 

t^-. 


SJB'^  IB^- 


/V£l/v/  POSITION 


9  :;. 

i  ^ 

i 


ZS         B 


;2B* 


A"^ 


%    \ 


!iii[in 


f)^ 


1n  Hi] 


r  [ 


J 


EYOLUTIONS  OF   THE    LINE.  151 

No.  127o,  and   following.     He   will   then   com- 
mand : 

]j.    Change  front  forward^  on  the  first  hattalion. 

1708.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel* 
of  the  first  will  immediately  cause  his  battalion 
to  execute   a  change  of   front  forward^  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  745,  and  following. 

1709.  Each  of  the  other  colonels  will  cause  his 
battalion  to  ploy  into  double  column,  at  company 
distance;  which  being  executed,  he  will  com- 
mand:  1.    Column^  forward ;  2.    Guide  right. 

1710.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  Gen- 
eral will  add  : 

2.  March,  (or  double-quick — March.) 

1711.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  subordi- 
nate battalions  will  put  themselves  in  movement 
towards  the  line  of  battle;  the  leading  guide  of 
each,  advancing  the  left  shoulder,  will  so  direct 
himself  that,  on  arriving  at  the  point  opposite  to 
the  right  marker  placed  in  advance  by  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel,  he  may  find  himself  at  a  distance 
from  the  line  of  battle  equal  to  the  depth  of  the 
column. 

1712.  The  head  of  each  battalion  having  ar- 
rived at  that  point  will  turn  to  the  right  in 
order  to  march  perpendicularly  up  to  the  line  of 
battle,  and  when  at  three  paces  from  this  line,  its 
colonel  will  cause  the  column  to  close  in  mass  and 
to  deploy. 


152  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

1713.  Each  colonel  will  hold  himself  on  the 
side  of  the  direction  abreast  with  the  leading  di- 
vision of  his  battalion,  pending  its.  march  towards 
the  line  of  battle. 

»  1714.  The  lieutenant-colonels  will  throw  them- 
selves in  advance  on  the  line,  as  prescribed,  No. 
1650,  for  changes  of  direction  of  a  line  of  bat- 
taHons  in  columns.     See  No.  1244. 

1715.  The  line  being  formed,  the  General  will 
command : 

Colours — Posts. 

1716.  If  the  line  be  in  march,  the  General 
will  cause  it  to  change  front  forward  by  the  same 
commands  and  means,  with  the  followins:  modi- 
fications :  he  will  cause  the  markers  to  be  placed 
on  the  new  direction,  before  the  position  to  be  oc-" 
cupied  by  the  first  company,  first  battalion ;  this 
will  form  forward  as  prescribed,  No.  7i'>4,  and  fol- 
lowing; each  of  the  others  will  double  column  as 
indicated,  No.  787,  and  following,  and  the  move- 
ment will  be  concluded  as  just  prescribed. 

1717.  A  line  will  change  front  forward  on  its 
left,  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  in- 
verse means. 

2d.  Changes  of  front  to  the  rear. 

(^Moven^ent  of  the  first  line.) 

1718.  To  change  front  to  the  rear,  on  the  right 
of  the.  line,  the    General   will   cause   the   right 


EYOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE.  153 

company,,  first  battalion  to  be  established  on  the 
new  direction,  and  place  two  markers  before  this 
company  as  prescribed,  No.  760  3  he  will  then 
command : 

1.   Change  front  to  the  rear,  on  the  first  latialion. 

1719.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel 
of  the  first  will  immediately  cause  his  battalion 
to  execute  a  change  of  front  to  the  rear  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  761,  and  following. 

1720.  Each  of  the  other  colonels  will  cause 
his  battalion  to  ploy  into  double  column  at  com- 
pany distance,  face  it  by  the  rear  rank,  and  then 
command:  1.    Column^  forward ;  2.  Guide  left. 

1721.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  Gen- 
eral will  add : 

2.  March,  (or  douhle-quick — March.) 

1722.  This  having  been  briskly  repeated,  the 
subordinate  battalions  will  put  themselves  in 
movement  towards  tho  line  of  battle;  the  lead- 
ing guide,  advancing  the  right  shoulder  will  direct 
himself  as  prescribed.  No.  1711. 

1723.  The  leading  division  of  each  battalion 
having  arrived  at  the  point  opposite  to  the  marker 
placed  in  advance  by  the  lieutenant- colonel,  and 
distant  the  whole  depth  of  the  column,,  will  turn 
to  the  left  in  order  to  march  up  perpendicularly 
to  the  line  of  battle,  then  cross  this  line  between 
the  two  markers,  placed  in  advance  by  the  lieu- 


154  EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINE. 

tenant-colonel;  and  when  the  head  of  the  hattalion 
has  passed  the  line  a  distance  equal  to  its  depth 
(closed)  and  three  paces  more,  the  colonel  will 
cause  the  column  to  close  in  mass,  to  ftice  bj  the 
front  rank,  and  to  deploy. 

1724.  The  lieutenant-colonels  will  throw  them- 
selves in  advance  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  estab- 
lish upon  it  the  two  markers  as  prescribed,  No. 
1662. 

1725.  Changes  of  front  to  the  rear,  on  the  left 
of  the  line,  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
same  j)rinciples  and  by  inverse  means. 

3d.   Central  changes  of  front. 

(Movement  of  the  firat  line.^ 

1726.  The  General  wishing  to  change  front  on 
the  fifth  battalion,  by  throwing  forward  the  left 
wing,  will  cause  two  markers  to  be  placed  on  the 
direction  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  new  line  be- 
fore the  position  to  be  oc(?upied  by  the  right 
company  of  that  battalion,  and  then  cause  this 
company  to  be  established  against  the  markers ; 
he  will,  at  the  same  time,  order  the  colonel  of  the 
fourth  to  have  the  left  company  of  his  battalion 
conducted  to  and  established  on  the  same  align- 
ment, at  twenty- two  paces  from  the  right  of  the 
fifth  battalion. 

1727.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  Gen- 
eral will  command: 

1.    Change  front  on  the  fifth  hattalion,  left  wing 
forward.  2.  '^K^Q\\,{pxdouhle-qidclc — March.) 


EYOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  155 

1728.  The  colonel  of  the  fifth  will  immediately 
cause  his  battalion  to  execute  a  chan<:e  of  front 
forward  on  its  right  company,  and  the  colonel  of 
the  fourth  a  change  of  front  to  the  rear  on  the 
left  company  of  hi.s  battalion. 

1729.  The  battalions  to  the  left  of  the  fifth 
will  each  execute  its  movement  as  prescribed  for 
the  subordinate  battalions  in  changes  of  front 
forward  on  the  right  of  the  line,  and  the  battal- 
ions to  the  right  of  the  fourth,  will  each  execute  its 
movement  as  indicated  for  changes  of  front  to  the 
rear  on  the  left  battalion. 

1730.  The  General,  wishing  to  throw  the  right 
wing  forward,  instead  of  the  left,  will  take  as  the 
basis  of  alignment,  the  left  company  of  the  fourth 
battalion,  and  command : 

1.  Change  front  on  the  fourth  hattalion,  right 
icing  forward.  2.  M.A.'&QYi.j  (or  double-quick — 
March. 

1731.  The  fourth,  and  the  battalions  to  its 
right,  will  execute  a  change  of  front  forward,  on 
the  left  of  the  fourth  battalion. 

173^5.  The  fifth,  and  the  battalions  to  its  left, 
will  execute  a  change  of  front  to  the  rear,  on  the 
right  of  the  fifth  battalion. 

Oblique  changes  of  front. 

1733.  Oblique  changes  of  front  will  be  exe- 
cuted according  to   the  same  principles  as  the 


156  EYOLUTIONS    OF  THE    LINE. 

perpendicular  changes,  but  observing  what  fol- 
lows: 

(^Movement  of  the  first  line.) 

1734.  The  directing  battalion  will  conform  it- 
self to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  775 ;  the  subor- 
dinate battalions,  after  being  ployed  into  double 
columns,  will  be  directed  towards  the  new  line 
of  battle  by  the  means  indicated,  No.  1G49,  or 
No.  1663,  according  as  their  change  of  front  may 
be  forward  or  to  the  rear. 

Remark  on  the  changes  of  front. 

1735.  In  changes  of  front  of  several  battalions, 
the  General  will  always  take  the  right  or  left 
company  of  one  of  the  battalions  as  the  basis  of 
the  movement. 

Changes  of  front  of  two  lines. 

1736.  AVhen  two  lines,  drawn  up  one  behind 
the  other,  have  to  change  front,  the  first  will 
always  execute  its  movements  as  if  it  were  alone. 

1737.  The  position  of  the  second  line  being 
necessarily  subordinate  to  that  of  the  first,  it 
cannot,  like  the  first,  execute  its  movement  on  a 
fixed  pivot,  consequently  it  will  employ,  in  order 
to  pass  into  the  new  position,  the  means  about  to 
be  indicated. 

1738.  The  General  of  each  line  \Cill  cause  the 
movement  to  be  commenced  as  soon  as  the  basis 
of  the  new  direction  is  establiabed. 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE    LINE.  157 

IsL   Clianges  of  front  perpendicularly  forward  on 
the  right  of  the  first  line. 

1739.  It  is  supposed  that  two  lines,  each 
of  eight  battalions  deployed,  arc  so  placed 
that  the  centre  of  each  battalion  of  the  second 
line  is  opposite  to  the  middle  of  the  interval  to 
the  right  of  the  corresponding  battalion  of  the 
first  line ;  the  General-in-Chief,  wishing  to  cause 
a  change  of  front  forward  to  be  executed  on  the 
right  of  the  first  line,  will  determine  the  direction 
of  this  line ;  he  will  place  upon  it  three  markers, 
two  before  the  position  to  be  occupied  by  the 
right  company  of  the  first  battalion,  and  the  third 
a  hundred  paces  beyond. 

1740.  These  markers,  who  form  the  basis  of 
alignment  for  the  first  line,  being  established,  the 
basis  will  be  prolonged  by  mounted  oSicers  in  the 
manner  indicated.  No.  1272,  and  following. 

1741.  The  General-in-chief  will  then  order 
another  officer  to  trace  the  new  direction  for  the 
second  line,  which,  it  is  supposed,  ought  to  be  es- 
tablished at  three  hundred  and  seventy  paces 
from  the  first,  and  parallelly  t  •  this  line  ;  he  will, 
at  the  same  time,  advise  the  General  of  each  line 
of  the  movement  he  wishes  to  have  executed. 

1742.  The  officer  designated  to  trace  the  di- 
rection of  the  second  line,  will  take  three  hun- 
dred and  seventy  paces  along  the  front  of  the 
first  line  from  its  right,  place  a  marker  where  he 
halts,"  then  a  second  at  a  hundred  paces  from  the 

14 


W9  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

firsfc  marker,  in  a  direction  parallel  to  the  new  po* 
sition  of  the  first  line  ;  and,  finally,  a  third  marker 
at  the  point  of  ajipui  for  the  right  of  the  second 
line. 

1743.  The  basis  of  the  second  line  being  thus 
established,  it  will  be  prolonged  bj  mounted  offi- 
eers  as  above. 

1744:.  The  G-eneral  of  the  second  line  will  or| 
der  the  maj  jr-general  of  its  right  wing  to  caus^ 
the  three  battalions  on  the  right  to  .break  by  com- 
pany to  the  left  in  order  to  march  to  their  new 
position.  He  will,  at  the  same  time,  order  the 
other  major-general  of  this  line  to  give  the  com- 
tnands,  and  make  the  preparatory  dispositions 
for  the  execution  of  a  change  of  front  forward 
on  the  third  battalion,  by  all  the  battalions  U:) 
the  left  of  the  third,  and  then  to  direct  these  bat- 
talions upon  their  new  positions  to  the  left  of  the 
first  three.  i 

1745.  As  soon  as  the  three  battalions  of  the 
right  .shall  have  broken  into  column  by  company^ 
and  the  five  battalions  of  the  left  shall  have  been 
ployed  into  double  coluu)ns,  the  major-general 
of  each  portion  of  the  line  will  put  it  in  move- 
ment. 

174(3.  The  column,  formed  of  the  three  battal- 
ions of  the  right,  will  march  towards  the  new 
position,  and  be  so  directed  as  to  pass,  in  its 
whole  depth,  the  marker  placed  at  the  point 
where  its  right  will  rest  when  in  line )  arrived 
opposite  to  this  marker,  the   column  will  prolong 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINK.  159 

itself  on  the  nevr  line  of  battle;  and  when  the 
right  compaTiy  (now  in  the  rear)  of  the  first  bat- 
talion lias  arrived  opposite  to  the  point  of  nppui, 
the  major  general,  who  coniniands  this  column, 
will  halt  and  form  it  to  the  riijht,  into  line  of 
hattlf. 

1747.  The  five  battalions  of  the  left  will  march 
diagonally  to  their  front  towards  the  new  line  of 
battle,  in  order  to  form  successively  to  the  left  of 
the  first  three.  This  movement  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  princ.ples  prescribed  for  changes 
of  front  forward.  The  colonel  of  the  fourth  will 
take  care  so  to  direct  his  battalion  as  to  prolong 
it  in  rear  of  the  line,  leaving  between  the  right 
flank  of  his  Cdlumn,  and  the  line,  a  distance  of 
at  least  fifry-five  paces.  The  leading  division 
having  arrived  ;it  the  point  opposite  to  the  right 
marker  placed  in  advance  by  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel, will  turn  to  the  right  in  order  to  march  up 
perpendicularly  to  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  it 
shall  be  at  three  paces  from  this  lii.e,  the  colonel 
will  close  the  battalion  into  mass  and  deploy  it. 

1748.  Each  of  the  remaining  battalions  will 
regulate  itself  by  that  to  its  right;  arrived  at  the 
point  opposite  to  its  right  marker,  the  battalion 
will  finish  its  movement  as  just  prescribed  for 
that  of  the  fourth. 

1749.  The  General  of  the  second  line  will  su- 
perintend its  whole  movement,  but  more  particu- 
larly'- see  that  the  three  battalions  which  broke  by 
company,  and  which  form  the  basis  of  alignment, 


160  EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE. 

be  promptly  and  correetlj  established  on  the  new 
line  of  battle.  This  rule  is  general  for  the  second 
line  in  all  changes  of  front. 

1750.  The  change  of  front  on  the  left  of  the 
line  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples and  by  inverse  means  j  but  as,  by  the  sup- 
position made,  No.  1739,  the  second  line  is  out- 
flanked on  the  left,  to  the  extent  of  a  half  battal- 
ion, by  the  first  line,  only  two  battalions  on  the 
left  of  the  second,  will  break  into  column  by 
company. 

2d.   Changes  of  front  perpendicularli/  to  the  rear, 
on  the  right  of  the  first  line. 

1751.  The  Greneral-in-chief,  wishing  to  cause  a 
change  of  front  to  the  rear  to  be  executed  on  the 
right  of  the  first  line,  will  cause  the  right  com- 
pany of  the  first  battalion  to  be  thrown  back  on 
the  new  direction ;  he  will  direct  two  markers  to 
be  placed  before  this  company,  and  a  third  at  a 
hundred  paces  from  the  point  of  o-^;  wi  for  the 
right;  he  will  next  cause  the  line  of  battle  to  be 
prolonged  by  mounted  officers,  as  indicated.  No. 
1740,  and  charge  an  officer  to  trace  the  new  di- 
rection of  the  second  line,  which  it  is  supposed 
ought  to  be  established  at  three  hundred  and 
seventy  paces  from  the  first,  and  in  a  parallel  di- 
rection. 

1752.  The  officer  charged  with  establishing 
the  new  direction  of  the  second  line  will  take 


EVOLUTIONS   OF  THE   LINE.  161 

tbree  hundred  and  seventy  paces  in  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  first  from  its  right;  he  will  place  a 
marker  where  he  halts,  then  a  second  at  a  hun- 
dred paces  from  the  first  marker  in  the  direction 
that  has  been  indicated  to  him,  and  a  third  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  other  two  at  the  point  of 
ajppuL  for  the  right  of  the  second  line. 

1753.  The  basis  of  alignment  teing  thus  as- 
sured, it  will  be  prolonged,  and  another  marker 
or  mounted  officer  placed  at  the  point  where  the 
right  battalions  will  have  to  cross  the  new  line  of 
battle. 

1754.  The  General  of  the  second  line  will  or- 
der the  major  general  of  its  right  wing  to  cause 
the  three  battalions  of  the  right  to  break  by  com- 
pany to  the  right,  in  order  to  march  to  their  new 
position.  He  will  at  the  same  time  order  the 
other  major  general  of  this  line  to  give  tlic  com- 
mands, and  to  make  the  preparatory  dispositions 
for  the  execution  of  a  change  ol  fri)nt  to  the  rear, 
on  the  third  battalion,  by  all  the  battalions  to  the 
left  of  the  third,  and  then  to  direct  these  five  bat- 
talions upon  their  new  position  to  the  left  of  the 
first  three. 

1755.  As  soon  as  the  three  battalions  of  the 
right  have  broken  into  column  by  company,  and 
the  five  battalions  of  the  left  have  ployed  into 
double  columns  and  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  the 
major  general,  of  each  portion  of  the  line,  will 
put  it  in  movement. 


162  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THB    LINE. 

1756.  The  column,  formed  of  the  battalions  of 
the  right,  will  be  directed  on  the  officer  placed  at 
the  point  where  it  ought  to  cross  the  new  line 
of  battle ;  and  when  this  column  has  passed  the 
line,  it  will  change  direction  to  the  left  in  order 
to  prolong  itself  on  the  line.  The  leading  subdi- 
vision having  arrived  at  company  distance  from 
the  point  of  a^j^ul  for  the  right  of  the  second 
line,  the  major  general  will  halt  the  column  and 
form  it  to  the  lej't  and  faced  to  the  rcar^  in  I'^'r^f 
hattlc. 

1757.  The  battalions  of  the  left  will  march 
diagonally  towards  the  new  line  of  battle,  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed  for  changes  of 
front,  to  the  rear;  but  each  leading  guide,  in- 
stead of  advancing  the  shoulder,  will  turn  to  the 
left  at  the  moment  of  putting  himself  in  march. 
The  fourth  battalion  will  march  in  rear  of  the 
old  position,  and  be  so  directed  that,  on  arriving 
at  its  point  of  formation  on  the  new,  it  may  be 
perpendicular  to  this  line,  when  it  will  be  formed 
on  it  to  the  left  of  the  first  three  battalions  as 
prescribed,  No.  1723,  and  following.  ^ 

1758.  Each  of  the  remaining  battalions  will 
regulate  itself  on  that  which  precedes  it  in  the 
movement,  and  conform  itself  to  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  fourth. 

1759.  The  General  of  this  line  will  conform 
himself  in  the  execution  of  the  movement,  to 
\^hat  is  indicated,  No.  1749. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF   THE   LINE.  163 

1760.  The  change  of  front  to  the  rear  on  the 
left  of  the  first  line  will  be  executed  according 
to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means ;  and 
if  the  second  line  be  outflanked  on  the  left  by 
the  first,  as  supposed  above,  only  the  two  battal- 
ions on  the  left  of  the  second  line  will  break  into 
column  by  company. 

3c?.    Changes  of  front  'perpendicularly  on  the  ffth 
battalion  of  the  first   line,  the  left  icing  throirn 
forward. 
-J. 

.  1761.  The  General-in-chief,  wishing  to  cau'^o 
a  change  of  front  to  be  executed  on  the  filtli 
battalion,  first  line,  by  throwing  forward  the 
left  wing,  will  determine  the  new  direction  of  thiK 
line,  by  placing  before  the  right  of  the  filth  bat- 
talion, three  markers  in  the  manner  indicated, 
No.  1789.  As  soon  as  they  are  established,  he 
will  cause  the  left  company  of  the  fourth  battal- 
ion to  be  conducted  to  and  established  on  the 
new  alignment,  and  then  cause  two  markers  to  be 
placed  before  this  company. 

1762.  The  basis  of  the  new  direction  of  tb« 
first  line  being  thus  established,  the  General-in- 
chief  will  cause  it  to  be  prolonged  by  mounted 
officers  }  he  will,  at  the  same  time  charge  an  offi- 
cer to  trace  the  new  position  of  the  second  line, 
which  it  is  supposed  ought  to  be  established  three 
hundred  and  seventy  paces  from  the  first,  and  in 
a  parallel  direction. 


164  EVOLUTIONS   OF  THE   LINE. 

1763.  The  officer  charged  with  tracing  the 
new  direction  of  the  second  line  will  pass  alohg 
the  front  of  the  first  towards  its  left,  and  take 
three  hundred  and  seventy  paces  from  the  right 
of  the  fifth  battalion  ;  he  will  place  a  marker 
where  he  halts,  then  a  second  at  a  hundred  paces, 
in  front  of  the  first  line,  in  the  direction  that  has 
been  indicated  to  him,  and  a  third  a  hundred 
paces  in  the  rear  on  the  prolongation  of  the  two 
others. 

1764.  The  basis  of  the  new  direction  of  the 
second  line  being  thus  established,  it  will  be  pro- 
longed, and  another  marker  or  mounted  oflicer 
placed  at  the  point  of  intersection  of  the  old  and 
new  positions  of  the  second  line. 

1765.  The  General  of  the  second  line  will 
cause  the  first  seven  battalions  to  break  by  com- 
pany to  the  left,  and  order  the  colonel  of  the 
eighth  to  ploy  his  battalion  into  double  column, 
at  company  distance,  in  order  to  march  on  the 
lino  of  battle,  and  to  form  upon  it  to  the  left  of 
the  seventh. 

1766.  The  first  seven  battalions  having  broken 
by  company,  the  General  of  the  line  will  put  them 
in  march  ;  this  column  will  march  straight  for- 
ward, and  after  having  crossed  the  new  line  of 
battle,  it  will  change  direction  to  the  right,  and 
prolong  itself  on  that  line.  The  fifth  company, 
fifth  battalion  (counting  from  its  right)  having 
nearly  arrived  opposite  to  the  right  of  the  cor- 
responding battalion  of  the  first  line,  which  has 


ETOLUTIONS   OP   THE   LINK.  165 

served  as  the  basis  of  the  movement,  the  General 
of  the  second  lino  will  halt  the  column,  and  fotm 
it  to  the  right  and  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of 
battle. 

1767.  As  soon  as  the  eighth  battalion  is  ployed 
into  double  column,  its  colonel  will  conduct  it  to 
the  new  line  of  battle,  in  conformity  with  what 
is  prescribed  for  the  fourth  battalion  in  changing 
front  forward  on  the  right  of  the  first  line. 

1768.  The  General-in-chief  will  superintend 
the  movement  of  the  two  lines  ;  he  will  see  that, 
in  the  first  line,  the  directing  battalions  (the  fifth- 
and  fourth,)  as  well  as  the  subordinate  battalions 
which  change  front  forward,  execute  their  re- 
spective movements  promptly,  in  order  to  facili- 
tate the  establishment  of  the  second  line,  and  he 
will  retard  the  execution  of  the  movement  of  the 
subordinate  battalions  which  change  front  to  the 
rear,  until  those  of  the  second  line  may  be  suffi- 
ciently advanced  not  to  obstruct  the  former. 

1769.  If,  in  changing  front  on  th3  centre,  it 
be  wished  to  throw  the  right  wing  forward,  the 
movement  will  be  executed  on  the  left  of  the 
fourth  battalion,  first  line  ]  but  if  the  second  line 
be  outflanked  to  the  left,  as  has  been  supposed, 
the  last  six  battalions  only  will  break  by  compa- 
ny to  the  right,  and  these  battalions  will  be  con- 
ducted to  and  formed  on  the  line  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed.  No.  1766.  The  column 
will  be  halted  at  the  moment  the  left  company  of 
the  fourth  battalion  arrives  opposite  to  the  colour 


166  KTOLUTIONS   OP   THE    LINE. 

of  the  corresponding  battalion  of  the  first  line, 
which  battalion  has  served  as  the  basis  of  the 
movement. 

1770.  The  second  and  first  battalions  will  each 
execute  its  movement  as  prescribed  for  the  eighth, 
No.  1767;  but  by  inverse  means. 

Oblique  clianges  of  front. 

\U.  Oblique  change  of  front  forward  on  tlic  right 
of  the  first  line. 

1771.  This  movement  will  be  rxecuted  accord- 
idg  to  the  principles  prescribed,  No.  1736,  and 
follovi'ing,  and  No.  1739,  and  following,  but  ob- 
serving what  follows. 

1772.  If  it  be  intended  to  establish  the  second 
line  parallelly  to  the  first,  the  General  in-chief, 
after  having  determined  the  direction  of  the  first 
line,  will  cause  the  angle  formed  by  the  old  and 
new  directions  to  be  measured  in  the  manner  fol- 
lowing. 

1773.  The  lieutenant-colonel  (or  the  adjutant) 
of  the  right  battalion,  first  line,  will,  on  an  inti- 
ii:ation  from  the  General  in-chief,  place  himself 
before  and  near  the  right  file  of  this  btittalion; 
then  face  to  the  left,  march  fifty  paces  along  the 
front  rank,  halt,  and  face  to  his  right;  he  will 
next  march  perpendicularly  to  the  front  of  this 
battalion,  counting  his  paces;  the  Gcncral-in- 
chief,  placed  on  the  right,  will  halt  him  the  mo- 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  167 

ment  that  lie  comes  between  the  General  and  the 
point  of  direction  to  the  left  of  the  new  position  ] 
the  lieutonant  colonel  will  stand  fast,  till  he  re- 
ceive an  intimation  to  return  to  his  battalion,  and 
the  General,  after  receiving  a  report  of  the  num- 
ber of  paces  taken  by  that  oJBicer  to  the  front, 
(and  the  number  will  here  be  supposed  to  be  sev- 
enty,) will  cause  the  basis  of  alignment  to  be  es- 
tablished as  indicated,  No.  1739. 

1774.  The  basis  of  the  new  position  of  the  first 
line  being  assured,  and  the  angle  formed  by  the 
old  and  new  positions  measured,  the  General-in- 
chief  will  charge  an  officer  to  trace  the  new  posi- 
tion of  the  second  line';  to  this  end,  he  will  give 
to  this  officer  the  number  of  paces  to  be  taken 
along  the  front  of  the  first  line,  say  four  hundred 
and  sixty,  and  the  number  of  paces  which  the 
lieutenant  colonel  had  counted  marching  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  front,  which,  as  has  just  been 
seen,  was  seventy. 

1775.  The  officer  designated  w'ill  march  to- 
wards the  left  of  the  first  line  the  given  distance ; 
and  in  order  to  determine  the  new  direction  of 
the  second  line,  he  will,  by  order  of  the  General, 
cause  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  battalion  be- 
fore which  he  halts,  to  repeat  the  operation  indi- 
cated, No.  1773  •  the  lieutenant  colonel,  setting 
off  from  that  point,  will  march  fifty  paces  along 
the  front  of  the  line  towards  its  left,  and  then 
seventy  perpendicularly  to  the  front,  wtich  from 


168  EVOLUTIONS   OP   THE   LINE. 

this,  to  the  point  from  which  he  started,  will  be    , 
the  new  direction  of  the  second  line. 

1776.  The  basis  of  the  new  position  of  the 
second  line  being  assured,  it  will  be  prolonged  to 
the  left  and  right.  v 

1777.  Those  dispositions  being  made,  the  Gen- 
eral of  the  second  line  will  establish  it  in  the  new 
position  by  the  means  indicated,  No.  174-1:,  and 
following;  but  he  will  cause  only  the  first  and 
second  battalions  (under  their  brigadier-general) 
to  break  by  company. 

1778.  This  column  being  formed,  the  second 
and  first  battalions  will  march  straight  forward, 
and  as  soon  as  the  head  of  the  column  has  passed 
the  new  line  of  battle,  it  will  change  direction  to 
the  right  in  order  to  prolong  itself  on  this  line, 
and  to  form  to  the  right,  into  line  of  battle^  in  the 
manner  indieated,  No.  1746. 

1779.  Each  of  the  other  six  battalions  will 
execute  its  movement  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  a  change  of  front  perpendicularly 
forward  ;  the  third  battalion  will  break  i'rom  the 
old  line  by  a  slight  wheel  to  the  left,  in  conformi- 
ty with  what  is  prescribed,  No.  1747,  for  the 
fourth  battalion. 

1780.  The  change  of  front  on  the  left  of  the 
line  will  be  made  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples J  but  if,  according  to  what  has  been  sup- 
posed, the  second  line  be  outflanked  on  the  left 
by  the^fi^st,  only  the  eighth  battalion  will  break 
to  the  right  by  company 


IT0LUTI0N8   or  THE   LINE.  169 

Ohlique  change  of  front  to  the  reavj  on  the  right 
of  tlie  first  line. 

1781.  This  Biovement  will  be  executed  accorei- 
ing  to  the  principles  prescribed,  No.  1734,  and 
following,  and  No.  1751,  and  following,  but  ob- 
serving what  follows. 

1782.  The  General-in-chief,  after  having  de- 
termined the  new  direction  of  the  first  line,  will 
cause  the  angle  formed  by  this  direction  with 
the  old  to  be  measured  behind  the  rear  rank  of 
the  first  battalion,  by  the  means  indicated.  No. 
1773. 

1783.  The  officer  who  traces  the  new  direction 
of  ihe  second  Jine  will  march  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  first,  to  the  right  of  its  point  of  ojjpiii  the 
number  of  paces  the  General  has  indicated  to 
him  'y  he  will  place  a  marker  at  the  point  where 
he  halts,  and  a  second  at  fifty  paces  from  the  first 
towards  the  right  of  the  line.  An  officer  whom 
he  will  have  designated,  will  throw  himself  close 
to  the  second  marker,  and  march  perpendicularly 
to  the  rear,  the  number  of  paces  fixed  fur  the 
opening  of  the  angle,  which  will  be  supposed  to 
be  eighty ;  which  being  executed,  the  basis  of 
alignment  will  be  traced  in  the  manner  indicated, 
No.  1773,  and  then  prolonged  to  the  lelt;  another 
marker  or  mounted  officer  will  be  placed  at  the 
point  where  the  old  position  of  the  second  line, 
prolonged,  cuta  the  new. 

15 


170 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 


1784.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  sec- 
ond line  will  be  established  in  the  new  position 
by  the  means  indicated  for  a  change  of  front  per- 
pendicularly to  the  rear;  but  only  two  battalions 
will  be  broken  by  company,  and  these  will  then 
conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  No. 
1756. 

1785.  The  remaining  six  battaUons  will  each 
execute  its  movenient  in  the  manner  prescribed, 
No.  1757,  and  following;  the  third  battalion  will 
conform  itself  to  what  is  there  designated  for  the 
fourth. 

1786.  The  oblique  change  of  front  to  the  rear, 
on  the  left  of  the  first  line,  will  be  executed  aQ- 
cording  to  the  same  principles ;  but  if,  as  has 
been  supposed,  the  second  line  be  outflanked  to 
the  left  by  the  first,  the  eighth  battalion  only,  of 
the  second  line,  will  break  by  company  to  the 
left. 

dd.  Oblique  change  of  front,  on  the  Ji/th  battal- 
ion, the  left  wing  thrown  forward. 

1787.  This  movement  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed,  No.  1784,  and 
following,  and  No.  1761,  and  following,  but  ob- 
serving what  follows. 

1788.  The  General-in-chief  will  throw  himself 
on  the  right  of  the  fifth  battalion,  and  after  hav- 
ing determined  the  new  direction  ot  the  first  line, 
he  will  cause  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  this  battal- 
ion to  execute  what  is  prescribed,  No.  1773. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    LINE.  171 

1789.  The  officer  who  traces  the  new  position 
of  the  second  line  will,  in  passing  along  the  front 
of  the  first  towards  its  left,  take  from  the  right 
of  the  fifth  battiilion,  the  distance  that  the  Gene' 
ral-in-chief  has  given  to  him;  he  will  then,  in 
the  name  of  the  General,  cause  the  lieutenant 
colonel  of  the  battalion  before  which  he  halts,  to 
repeat  the  operation  just  prescribed  for  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  of  the  fifth  j  which  being  done,  he 
will  establish  the  basis  of  the  new  position,  cause 
it  to  be  prolonged  to  the  left  and  right,  and  place 
a  marker,  or  mounted  officer,  at  the  point  of  in-» 
teisection  of  the  old  and  new  positions  of  the 
second  line. 

1790.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  sec- 
ond line  will  be  established  in  its  new  position  by 
the  means  indicated  for  a  perpendicular  chjinge 
of  front  on  the  centre  ;  but  only  the  first  five  bat- 
talions will  break  by  company ;  each  of  these 
battalions  will  finish  its  movement  in  the  manner 
indicated,  No.  1766. 

1791.  Each  of  the  last  three  battalions  will  be 
ployed  into  double  column,  and  established  in 
the  new  position  to  the  left  of  the  first  five,  in 
the  manner  indicated,  No.  1767;  the  sixth  and 
seventh  battalions  will  each,  conforming  itself  to 
what  is  prescribed  for  the  eighth,  break  from  the 
old  line  by  a  slight  wheel  to  the  left. 

1792.  If,  in  changing  front  on  the  centre,  it 
be  wished  to  throw  forward  the  right  wing,  the 
movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same 


172  EVOLUTIONS  OF   THE    LINE. 

principles  on  the  left  of  the  fourth  battalion,  but 
observing  what  follows. 

1793.  The  last  five  battalions  will  break  by 
company  to  the  right,  and  be  established  in  the 
new  position  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, No.  1790,  but  by  inverse  means. 

1794.  The  three  other  battalions  will  each  be 
ployed  into  column  doubled  on  its  centre,  and  es- 
tablished in  the  new  position  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed,  No.  1791;  the  third  and 
second  battalions  will  break  from  the  old  line  by  a 
slight  wheel  to  the  right. 

Remarks  on  changes  of  front  of  two  lines. 

1T95.  The  distance  between  the  two  lines  and 
the  position  of  the  second  in  respect  to  the  first, 
cannot  be  fixed,  as  both  distance  and  position  de- 
pend on  the  ground  and  other  circumstances. 

1796.  In  the  preceding  examples,  the  distance 
between  the  two  lines  has  been  calculated  at  about 
three  hundred  and  seventy  paces,  and  the  position 
of  the  second  line  supposed  to  be  nearly  parallel 
to  that  of  the  first  ]  but  the  rules  which  have 
been  prescribed  are  applicable  to  all  changes  of 
front  of  two  lines,  and  give  the  means  of  throw- 
ing the  second  line  to  any  distance  from  the  first, 
and  of  establishing  it  in  whatever  direction  the 
General-in-chief  may  judfi;e  best. 

1797.  So  in  halting,  soorier  or  later,  the  battal- 
ions of  the  second  line  which  have  broken  into 


EVOLUTIONS   or  THE   LINE.  173 

column  by  company,  the  General-in-cliief  can 
give  to  this  line  any  point  of  appid  he  may  wish, 
and  consequenfJy  cause  it  to  outflank  the  first  to 
the  right  or  kl't  by  any  number  of  companies  or 
battalions  he  may  desire ;  or,  finally,  he  can  so 
dispose  the  second  line  that  each  of  its  battalions 
shall  find  itself  exactly  behind  the  corresponding 
battalion  of  the  first  line. 

1798.  In  oblique  changes  of  front,  the  distance 
to  be  paced  by  the  officer  charged  with  tracing 
the  new  position  of  the  second  line,  will  always 
be  greater  than  that  which  it  is  desired  should 
separate  the  two  lines  after  the  termination  of 
the  movement;  and  this  difi"erence  will  be  in- 
creased in  proportion  a'^  the  angle  formed  by  the 
old  and  new  directions  is  diminished. 

J799.  The  number  of  battalions  of  the  second 
line  which  ought  to  break  by  company,  depends 
on  the  movement  to  be  executed ;  thus,  in  changes 
of  front  forward,  it  will  be  the  battalions  between 
the  point  of  appui  of  the  old  position  and  the 
point  where  the  new  position,  prolonged,  cuts  the 
old. 

1800.  In  changes  of  front  to  the  rear,  the 
number  of  battalions  to  break  by  company  is  de- 
termined by  the  distance  which  there  ought  to  be 
from  the  point  of  appui  of  the  new  position,  to 
the  point  where  the  old  position,  prolonged,  cuts 
the  new. 

1801.  What  has  just  been  said  in  the  two  pre- 
ceding numbers  applies  to  all  changes  of  front 


174  EVOLUTIONS    or    THE    LINE. 

either  perpendicular  or   oblique;  but   i  , 
latter,  the  distance  between  the  point  of  ap 
the  new  position,  and  the  point  where  the  o 
sition,  prolongea,  cuts  the  new,  is  less  than  i 
perpendicular  changes,    and   as  it  diminishes  in 
proportion  to  the  lessening  of   the  angle  formed 
by  the  old  and  new  positions,  it  follows  that  the 
number  of  battalions  to   be  broken  by  company 
ought  also  to  be  less. 

1802.  The  same  rule  will  be  observed  for 
changes  of  front  on  an  interior  battalion  of  the 
line  as  for  changes  of  front  forward  ;  thus,  in  the 
change  of  front  on  the  fifth  battalion,  left  wing 
thrown  forward,  described  No.  1701,  and  follow- 
ing, all  the  battalions  are  made  to  break  by  com- 
pany which,  in  the  old  position,  found  themselves 
between  the  point  of  appui  and  the  point  where 
that  position  is  cut  by  the  new  one. 

1803.  The  battalions  which  break  by  company, 
having  to  serve  as  the  basis  of  movement  for  the 
second  line,  the  General  of  this  line  will  carefully 
see  that  they  are  correctly  established  in  the  new 
position;  to  this  end,  he  will  assure  himself,  be- 
fore these  battalions  are  formed  into  line  of  bat- 
tle, that  they  are  in  the  proper  direction,  and,  if 
not,  make  the  necessary  rectifications. 

1804.  This  attention  is  particularly  necessary, 
when  the  second  line  is  to  be  established  paral- 
lelly  to  the  first;  for,  in  this  case,  if  the  change 
of  front  be  perpendicular,  the  direction  of  the 
second  line  will  depend  solely  on  the  covp  d'ceil 


^- 


4 


■— ^* 


Ii<^ 


r 


-t 


h 


t  a 


^    af 


1  )\s 


e 
L 

t: 

s; 
P 
F 
b 
I) 

0 

c 
li 
e 

t: 


BYOLUTIONS  OF   THE   LINE. 


175 


of  the  officer  charged  with  tracing  it,  and  if  it  be 

n  oblique  change,  the  means  indicater'  for  es- 

iblishing  the  parallelism  of  the  two  Hi.  s  (and 

ich  have  been  adopted  on  account  of  their  sim- 

ity)  may  make  a  diflference  between  the  angles 

I  .  rmed    by  each  old  direction   with  its    new.     A 

rt  of  the  first  line  being  already  established  in 

>  new  position,  at  the  time  for  halting  the    bat- 

1   lions  of  the  second  line  which  are  in  column  by 

V    mpany,  it  will  always  be  easy  for  the  General  of 

t;ic  SRJond   line,  with   a  practised  eye,  to  rectify 

any  error   that  may  have  been  committed  in    the 

first  trace  made  for  his  line. 

Article  XT. 

Order  in  echellon. 

1805.  Echellons   may  be  formed    parallelly,  or 
obliquely  to  the  line  of  battle,  either  by  the  right 
or  left  of  the  line,  and  by  battalion,  brigade  or 
*sion,  as  will  be  explained. 

Direct  echellons  in  advancing. 

lOQ.    The    General   wishing    to    form   direct 
t.ellons  by   the  right  and  by  brigade,  will  cooi- 
aand : 

1.  E^licllons  hy  hrigade,  at  (so  many)  paces.     2 
Forward,  hij  the  right,  form  echellons. 

1807.  (V.  68.)     These  commands  having  been 


176  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

repeated,  the  Brigadier-Greneral  of  the  right   bri- 
gade of  the  line  will  put  it  in  march  by  the   cor 
mands   and  means   indicated,  No.  1534,  and   fo 
lowing,  for  marching  a  line  in  the  order  in  battle^ 
and  take  the  first  as  the  directing  battalion. 

1808.  The  ris^ht  battalion  of  the  first  eehellon 
becoming  thus  the  regulator  of  the  march  of  all 
the  echellons,  the  General,  if  he  think  it  neces- 
sary, will  cause  markers  to  be  placed  behind  thi^ 
battalion  in  order  to  assure  its  direction.  * 

1809.  The  following  echellons  will,  in  succes-  i 
sion,  put  themselves  in  march,  each  observing  to 
maintain  between  itself  and  the  preceding  eehel- 
lon the  number  of  paces  prescribed  in  the  first 
command  :  each  Brigadier-General  will  cause 
that  number  of  paces,  taken  by  the  preceding 
eehellon  to  be  counted,  before  putting  his  own  in 
march. 

1810.  In  each  subordinate  eehellon,  a  file  clo- 
ser, designated  in   advance,  will  place  himself  in 
rear  of  and  opposite  to  the  left  file  of  the  prece- 
ding eehellon.     This  file  closer  will  march  exact-  , 
ly  in  the  trace  of  that  file  and  abreast  with   hisjl 
own  battalion;  by  this  means,  the  colonel  of  the] 
right  battalion  in  each   subordinate  eehellon  will 
always  be  able  to  maintain  the  interval  between 
his  own  battalion  and  that  on  the  left  of  the  pre- 
ceding eehellon. 

1811.  The  right  battalion  in  each  eehellon  will 
be  charged  with  preserving  the  perpendicular  dis- 
tance which  ought  to  separate  it  from  the  preced- 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE.  177 

ing  ecliellon ;  the  left  battalion  will  march  abreast 
with  that  origits  riirht,  and  take  care  to  preserve 
its  interval  to  the  right. 

1812.  The  echellons  being  in  march,  when  the 
General  shall  wish  tore-form  the  line,  he  will  give 
an  order  to  the  Brigadier-General  of  the  first 
echellon  to  halt  it. 

1813.  The  first  echellon  being  halted,  the  G-e- 
eral  will  determine  the  direction  to  be  given  to 

e  line,  and  the  brigadier  of  the  first  echellon 
will  establish  it  on  that  direction. 

1814.  The  other  echellons  will  continue  to 
march,  and  be  successively  halted  by  their  re- 
spective brigadiers  at  four  paces  from  the  line  of 
battle. 

1815.  The  second  echellon  being  halted,  its 
Brigadier-General  will  command :  I.  Colors  and 
general  guides — On  the  Line.  At  this,  the  co- 
lors and  general  guides  of  each  battalion  will  face 
to  the  right,  and  promptly  place  themselves  on 
the  alignment  of  the  colors  of  the  first  echellon ; 
which  being  done,  the  brigadier  of  the  second 
will  add  :  2.  Guides — On  the  Link.  Each  co- 
lonel, seeing  his  guides  established,  will  align  his 
battalion. 

1816.  The  remaining  echellons  will  establish 
themselves  successively  on  the  line  of  battle  by 
the  same  means. 

1817.  Each  brigadier  will  give  the  command, 
Guides — Posts,  as  soon  as  his  echelon  is  aligned; 
but  the  colors  will  not  fall  back  into  their  places 


178  EVOLUTIONS  OF    TBE  LINE. 

until  tlie  General  shall  add  :  colors — Posts,  which 
will  be  ^iven  after  the  establishmer^t  of  the  last 
echellon  on  the  line  of  battle. 

1818.  If,  instead  of  re-forming  the  line,  it  be 
the  wish  of  the  General  to  halt  the  echellons,  he 
will  give  an  order  to  that  effect  to  the  brigadier  of 
the  first,  and  send  a  caution  to  the  brigadiers  of 
the  others,  to  halt  their  echellons  each  in  the  po- 
sition where  it  finds  itself. 

1819.  Echellons  by  the  left  will  be  formed  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

Direct  echellons  in  retreat. 

1820.  It  be'ng  thf  wish  of  the  General  to 
inarch  in  retreat  by  cc.  ellon,  he  w  U  command  : 

1.  Echellons  hy  hrrgade,  at  (so  many)  paces.     2 
In  retreat,  hy  the  right,  Jorm  echellons. 

1821.  These  commands  having  been  repeated, 
the  brigadier  of  the  first  echellon  will  cause  it  to 
face  about,  and  then  put  it  in  march. 

1822.  The  brigadier  of  the  second  echellon 
will  cause  it  to  face  about,  soon  enough  to  be  able 
to  put  it  in  march  the  moment  it  has  its  distance 
from  the  first. 

1823.  Each  of  the  remaining  echellons  will 
execute  in  its  turn  what  has  just  been  prescribed 
for  the  second. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  179 

1824.  Each  following  echellon  will  throw  out 
a  file  closer  in  the  manner  and  for  the  purpose 
prescribed,  No.  1810. 

1825.  The  General,  wishing  to  re-form  the  line, 
will  order  the  brigadier  of  the  first  echellon  to 
halt  it. 

1826.  This  echellon  being  halted,  its  brigadier 
will  face  to  the  front,  and  establish  it  on  the  direc- 
tion which  may  be  indicated  to  him. 

1827.  Each  following  echellon  will  continue  to 
march,  and  when  at  four  paces  beyond  the  line  of 
battle,  its  brigadier  will  halt  it,  face  it  to  the 
front,  and  establish  it  on  the  line  by  the  means 
prescribed,  Nos.  1815-6. 

1828.  Echellons  in  retreat  will  be  formed  by 
the  left  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inverse  means. 

Oblique    echellons. 

1829.  It  being  intended  to  form  echellons  ob- 
liquely to  the  line  of  battle,  the  movement  will  be 
executed  in  the  following  manner. 

1830.  Say  that  the  movement  is  to  be  made 
by  the  right :  the  General  will  throw  himself  on 
the  right  of  the  line,  and  determine  the  new  di- 
rection according  to  his  views. 

1831.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  right  bat- 
talion will  then,  on  an  intimation  from  the  Gene- 
ral, execute  what  is  prescribed,  No.  1773,  for 
measuring  the  angle  formed  by  the  new  and  old 
directions*     It  will  be  supposed  that  the  opening 


180  EVOLUTIONS   OF   THB   LINE. 

of  this  angle  is  such,  that  the  lieutenant-colonel, 
after  marching  fifty  paces  along  the  front  of  the 
battalion,  had  to  take  thirty  paces  perpendicularly 
forward,  to  bring  himself  in  a  line  between  the 
General  and  the  point  of  direction  to  the  left. 

1832.  The  opening  of  the  angle  being  thus  as- 
certained, the  brigadier  of  the  first  echellon  will 
immediately  cause  it  to  change  front  forward  on 
its  right  company. 

1883.  The  General  will  then  send  an  order  to 
each  of  the  other  brigadiers  to  cause  his  echellon 
to  change  front  forward  to  thirty  paces  on  the 
right  company. 

1884.  As  each  subordinate  echellon  shall  have 
changed  front,  its  brigadier  will  cause  it  to  take 
its  interval  from  the  left  of  the  echellon  next  on 
its  right ;  to  this  end,  he  will  cause  it  to  break  to 
the  rear  into  column  by  company  by  the  left; 
■which  being  executed,  he  will  order  the  left  gen- 
eral guide  of  the  left  battalion  to  throw  himself 
on  the  prolongation  of  the  right  guides  a  little 
beyond  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  echellon 
will  rest  when  in  line. 

1885.  The  general  guide  being  correctly  estab- . 
lished,  the  brigadier  of  the  echellon  will  put  the 
column  in  march  in  order  to  prolong  it  on  its  line 
of  battle ;  the  leading  guide  will  direct  himself'j 
on  the  general  guide,  and  when  the  right  com- J 
pany,  now  in   the  rear,  shall  have  passed  twenty- 
two  paces  beyond  the  left  of  the  echellon  next  on 
its  right;  the  brigadier  of  the  echellon,  in  column;  | 


EYOLUTIONS   OF   THE    LINE.  181 

will  halt  it;  and  form  it  to  the  right  into  line  of 
battle. 

1836.  The  echellons  being  thus  formed,  the 
General  will  order  the  brigadier  of  the  first  eehel- 
lon  to  put  it  in  march ;  each  of  the  other  briga- 
diers will  put  his  echellon  in  march  as  soon  as  he 
sees  the  preceding  one  in  movement. 

1837.  The  echellons  thus  disposed  will  march, 
be  halted,  or  re-formed  into  line,  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed,  No.  1807  and  following,  for 
direct  echellons. 

1838.  Echell  ms  will  be  formed  obliquely  by 
the  left  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inverse  means. 

EemarJcs  on  the  order  in  echellon. 

1839.  The  distance  between  echellons  cannot 
be  fixed,  the  number  of  paces  necessarily  depend- 
ing on  the  views  of  the  General ;  but  it  ought  to 
be  such  as  to  allow  the  echellons  to  form  them- 
selves into  squares  without  danger  of  their  firing 
on  each  other. 

1840.  In  the  formation  of  oblique  echellons, 
the  distance  between  them  will  depend  on  the  ex- 
tent of  their  fronts  and  the  angle  formed  by  the 
old  and  new  directions ;  this  distance  may  be  ei- 
ther too  great  or  too  small ;  if  too  great,  the  Ge- 
neral, before  putting  the  echellons  in  march,  will 
give  an  order  to  the  brigadiers  of  the  subordinate 
echellons  to  advance,  and  then  halt  them  at  the 
prescribed  distance :  if,  on  the  contrary^  the  dis- 

16 


182  E70LIJTI0NS   OF   THE   LINE. 

tance  he  too  small,  the  subordinate  echellons  will 
only  put  themselves  in  movement  as  each  has  the 
given  distance  from  the  one  next  in  its  front. 

1841.  In  changes  of  front,  for  the  formation  of 
oblique  echellons,  the  angle  formed  by  the  old 
and  new  directions  being  necessarily  acute,  the 
subordinate  battalion  in  each  echellon  will  change 
front  by  the  same  means  as  the  directing  one,  in- 
stead of  ploying  into  double  column  in  order  to 
march  and  deploy  on  the  new  line. 

1842.  A  line  of  battalions,  deployed,  will  ha- 
bitually march  in  echellons;  but  if  the  Gene- 
ral judge  it  to  be  more  advantageous,  he  may 
ploy  each  battalion  into  column  by  division,  in 
rear  of  its  first  division,  if  the  echellons  are  form- 
ed by  the  right,  and  in  rear  of  the  last  division  of 
the  battalion,  if  echellons  be   formed  by  the  left. 

1843.  When  echellons  are  composed  of  battal- 
ions in  columns,  if  the  movement  be  by  the  right, 
the  file  closer  who  ought  to  march  abreast  with 
the  directing  battalion  of  each  subordinate  echel- 
lon, will  place  himself  on  the  prolongation  of  the 
fight  guides  of  the  left  battalion  in  the  echellon 
next  preceding  his  own,  and  march  exactly  in  the 
trace  of  those  guides.  If  the  movement  be  made 
by  the  left,  the  file  closer  will  place  himself  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  left  guides  of  the  right 
battalion  in  the  preceding  echellon. 

Article  XII. 

To  retreat  hy  alternate  battalions. 


EVOLUTIONS    OP  THE   LINE.  183 

1844.  The  retreat  by  alternate,  or  odd  and 
even  battalions,  will  be  executed  as  follows. 

1845.  The  General,  intending  to  execute  the 
retreat  by  alternate  battalions,  will  give  informa- 
tion of  his  purpose  to  the  two  next  officers  in 
rank,  who  are  respectively  to  command  the  lines 
of  odd  and  even  battalions,  and  at  the  same  time 
indicate  to  the  one  who  is  to  commence  the  move- 
ment the  position  in  which  he  will  halt  his  line. 
The  General  will  then  command  : 

1.  Retreat  hy  alternate  hattalions.     2.   Odd  (or 

everi)  battalions,  commence  the  movement. 

1846.  These  commands  having  been  been  re- 
peated, the  officer  (first  Major-General  or  first 
brigadier)  entitled  to  command  the  line  of  odd 
battalions,  and  which  line  it  is  supposed  ought  to 
commence  the  movement,  will  comjnand : 

1.   Odd  battalions,  face  to  the  rear. 

1847.  This  having  also  been  repeated,  the  co- 
lonels of  the  designated  battalions  will  cause  them 
to  face  about. 

1848.  The  commander  of  the  odd  battalions 
will  then  add : 

2.  The  ( — )  the  hattalion  of  direction.  3.  Bat- 
taliony  forward.  4.  March,  (or  double-quick — 
March.) 

1849.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeat- 
ed by  the  colonels  of  the  odd  battalions,  these  bat- 


184  EVOLUTIONS   OF  THE    LINE. 

talions  will  commence  the  march,  and  direct  them- 
selves perpendicularly  to  the  rear.  The  colonels 
of  the  subordinate  battalions  will  maintain  them 
abreast  with  the  directing  one  in  conformity  with 
what  is  prescribed,  No.  1558,  and  when  the  line 
arrives  at  the  position  indicated  by  the  General-in- 
chief,  the  General  of  this  line  will  command : 

1.  Battalions.     2.  Halt. 

1850.  At  the  second  command,  the  line  will 
halt,  each  colonel  will  immediately  face  his  bat- 
talion about,  the  commander  of  the  line  will  rec- 
tify the  alignment  of  the  directing  battalion,  the 
other  battalions  will  be  dressed  by  that,  without 
constraint,  however,  as  to  being  absolutely  on  the 
same  general  alignment. 

1851.  As  soon  as  the  odd  battalions  which  form 
the  second  line  have  faced  about,  the  General  of 
the  first  line  (of  even  battalions)  will  command : 

1.  Face  to  the  rear. 

""  1852.    This   will  be   executed   as   prescribed, 
No.  1847 ;  the  General  of  this  line  will  then  com-    ^ 
niand : 

2.   The  ( — )  the  hattalion  of  direction.     3.  Bat- 
talions, forward.     4.   ^Wic7<;^-MARCH. 

1853.  The  first  line  will  march  in  retreat  by 
the  means  prescribed,  No.  1849 ;  each  battalion 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE.  185 

will  be  directed  upon  the  middle  of  the  corres- 
ponding interval  in  the  second  line,  cross  this 
line,  and  march  perpendicularly  to  the  rear. 
When  it  arrives  at  the  position  indicated  by  the 
General-in-chief,  the  first  line  will  be  halted  and 
faced  about,  by  the  commands  and  means  indica- 
ted, Nos.  1849-50. 

1854.  The  second  line,  become  first,  will  exe- 
cute the  same  movement,  and  so  on  alternately. 

1855.  The  General-in-chief  will  superintend 
both  lines,  and  determine,  according  to  the  ground 
and  the  distance  he  may  wish  to  have  between  the 
lines,  the  position  each  ought  successively  to  oc- 
cupy. 

To  re-form  the  line. 

1856.  The  General-in-chief,  wishing  to  re-form 
the  line,  will  cause  the  drums  to  beat  a  short  roll, 
or  the  bugles  to  sound  the  assembly  after  the  first 
line  (the  one  actually  in  front)  is  put  in  march, 
which  roll  will  be  briskly  repeated  by  all  the 
drums  of  this  line. 

1857.  The  battalions  of  the  first  line  will  con- 
tinue to  march,  and  when  they  find  themselves 
exactly  in  their  intervals  of  the  second,  their  re- 
spective colonels  will  halt  them,  face  them  about 
and  rectify  their  alignment  ]  the  General-in-chief, 
will  then  give  a  general  alignment  if  he  judge  it 
necessary. 

Remarks  on  the  retreat  hy  alternate  hattalions. 


186  EVOLUTIONS   OF    TEE    LINE. 

1858.  The  General  of  eacli  line  will  endeavor  , 
to  maintain   the  necessary  harmony  between  its 
battalions,  notwithstanding  the  intervals  between 
them  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  look  to  the  strict  exe- 
cution of  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  1849-50. 

1859.  He  will  more  particularly  see  that  all  the 
battalions,  after  crossing  the  second  line,  direct 
themselves  perpendicularly  to  the  rear,  this  being 
the  only  means  by  which  the  intervals  can  be  pre- 
served with  sufficient  accuracy  to  enable  the  two 
lines  to  re-form  into  one. 

Article    XIII. 

Passage  of  lines. 


Passage  of  lines  in  retreat. 

1860.  The  General-in-chief,  wishing  to  execute 
the  passage  of  lines  in  retreat,  will  send  an  order 
to  the  General  of  the  second  line  to  place  it 
in  the  position  it  ought  to  occupy,  if  it  be  not  al- 
ready so  placed. 

1861.  The  battalions  of  this  line  will  form 
double  columns  closed  in  mass,  and  so  disposed 
that  the  centre  of  each  mass  may  be  opposite  to 
the  middle  of  the  interval  to  the  right  or  left  of 
the  corresponding  battalion  of  the  first  line,  ac- 
cording to  the  order  given  by  the  General-in- 
chief. 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE.  187 

18G2.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  Ge- 
Bleral-in-chief  will  send  an  order  to  the  General  of 
the  first  line,  to  execute  the  passage  of  lines  in 
retreat :  the  latter  will  immediately  command : 

1.  Pass  the  line  in  rear. 

1863.  This  command  having  been  repeated, 
each  colonel  will  cause  his  battalion  to  face  about; 
which  being  executed,  the  General  of  the  first 
jine  will  add : 

2.  Battalions,  forward.  3.   Quick — March. 

1864.  At  the  word  marchy  briskly  repeated, 
the  line  will  march  in  retreat ;  each  color-bearer 
will  direct  himself  upon  the  middle  of  the  corres- 
ponding interval  in  the  second  line. 

18G5.  The  first  line  being  about  forty  paces 
from  the  second,  each  colonel  will  cause  the  com- 
panies of  his  battalion  which  are  masked  by  the 
second  line  to  execute  the  passage  of  obstacles, 
which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  School  of 
the  Battalion. 

1866.  The  battalions  of 'the  first  line  will  con- 
tinue to  march,  and  pass  the  second,  when  the  co- 
lonels will  immediately  cause  the  companies  which 
were  broken  to  the  rear  to  return  into  line. 

1867.  The  colonels  of  the  second  line,  without 
regulating  themselves  on  each  other,  will  begin 
to  deploy  their  battalions  as  soon  as  the  latter  are 
cleared  by  the  battalions  of  the  first  line. 

1868.  As  goon  as  the  first  line  arrives  at  tha 


188  EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE. 

distance  in  the  rear,  indicated  by  the  General-in- 
chief,  the  General  of  this  line  will  halt  it,  face  it 
about,  and  then  make  the  dispositions  which  may 
have  been  ordered. 

Passage  of  lines  in  advancing. 

1869.  The  General-in-chief,  wishing  to  cause 
the  passage  of  lines  advancing,  to  be  executed, 
will  send  an  order  to  the  General  of  the  second 
line,  to  make  the  dispositions  in  rear  of  the  first 
indicated,  Nos.  1860-1,  if  they  be  not  already 
made. 

1870.  The  second  line  being  thus  disposed,  the 
General-in-chief  will  send  an  order  to  the  Gener- 
al of  this  line,  to  execute  the  passage  of  lines  ad- 
vancing, and  give  notice  thereof  to  the  General 
of  the  first  line. 

1871.  The  General  of  the  second  line  will  im- 
mediately command : 

1.  Pass  the  line  in  front.     2.  Battalions,  for- 
ward. 

1872.  These  commands  having  been  repeated, 
each  colonel  will  command  :  guide  centre. 

1873.  The  General  of  the  line  will  then  add  :       ' 

3.  March. — (or  douUe-quich — March.) 

1874.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  second  line 
will  advance;  each  battalion  will  direct  itself  up- 


EVOLUTIONS  OF    THE    LINE.  189 

nn  the  middle  of  the  corresponding  interval  in  the 
liiftt  line. 

1875.  At  the-approach  of  the  second  line,  each 
colonel  in  the  first  will  cause  the  right  and  left 
companies  of  his  battalion  to  be  ployed,  as  in 
mass,  behind  the  contiguous  companies  in  time 
not  to  arrest  the  movement  of  the  battalions  of  the 
second  line. 

1876.  The  battalions  of  the  second  line  "will 
thus  pass  the  first;  and  when  they  shall  have 
cleared  it,  the  General  of  the  second  will  desig- 
nate the  directing  battalion.  This  battalion  will 
take  the  guide  to  the  right,  and  the  subordinate 
battalions  will  take  the  guide  on  the  side  next  to 
the  directing  battalion. 

1877.  The  battalions  having  arrived  at  the 
given  position,  the  commander  of  the  line  will 
cause  them  to  halt  and  to  deploy. 

1878.  As  soon  as  the  second  line  has  passed  the 
first,  the  colonels  of  the  latter  will  cause  the  right 
and  left  companies  of  their  respective  battalions 
to  return  into  line. 

Article  XIY. 
Dispositions  against  aavalry. 

1879.  No  matter  what  the  number  of  batta- 
lions which  compose  a  column  or  line,  not  more 
than  two,  or  three,  will  be  formed  into  the  same 
square. 

1880.  A  square  of  more  than  one  battalion 


190  EVOLUTIONS  or   THE    LINE. 

ought  always  to  have  a  reserve.  If  of  three  bat- 
talions, this  reserve  will  be  formed  of  the  last  di- 
vision in  the  first  and  second  battalions:  in  a 
square  of  two  battalions,  the  reserve  will  be  the 
last  division  of  the  first  battalion.  This  rule  is 
general  whether  the  column  he  formed  with  the 
right  or  left  in  front. 

1881.  Three  battalions  will  be  supposed 
in  column  by  company  at  full  distance  and  right 
in  front :  the  commander  (Major-General  or 
Brigadier-G-eneral)  wishing  to  form  square, 
will  first  form  divisions ;  which  being  executed, 
he  will  close  the  column  to  half  (company)  dis 
tance  on  any  division  he  may  designate,  say  the 
headmost  one ;  to  this  end,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square,  2.  To  half  distance,  close 
column.    3.  March,  (or  douhle-quick — March.) 

1882.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will 
close  to  half  distance  by  the  means  heretofore  in- 
dicated, but  observing  what  follows. 

1883.  The  last  division,  first  battalion,  and  the 
last  of  the  second  battalion,  having  to  remain  in 
reserve  in  the  square,  the  chiefs  of  these  divi- 
sions will,  at  the  commencement  of  the  movement, 

.  break  off"  to  the  rear  three  files  from  the  right  and 
three  from  the  left ;  the  guides  will  close  upon  the 
outer  files  remaining  in  line,  and  the  left  guide  of 
each  of  these  divisions  will  march  in  the  trace  of 
the  file  opposite  to  him  in  the  division  immedi- 
ately preceding  his  own.     Each  of  these  two  di- 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE    LINE 


£LiiL 


l<\g  f) 


7-r:::Nr    :T-^c:--1^:_^^ 


^-:--ic:z^ 


T. — 1^  r- 


Tiiiiiimmiiiiifciiniiiiiimir 


llffiniliMMMMffl 


;>■ 

h 

i^ 

— T 

H 

f- 

1. 

1 1 

'      Ij  - 

— r 

s 

11 

f 

r 

d- 

T  M_.  _ 

■    d 

-p, 

il 

— r 

""TT 

=1 — 

H 

P 

■E" 

~-^- 

=^ 

,^. 

r_._ 

_:jl_ 

Z P 

•■ 

TiiiiniS»siaiiiiiiF 


,.  "iiiiriiiwiiMfEiiiiir 

— ^— - 

— p 

TMiiMJiiiaiiffliinmTr 

iiBiwifiiiiir 

'||i|iiiiriiiiii.iit"i!nmii!;]imji 

•V 

«  " 

::^ 

■liji'iaaMiiiBiif 

iiiiniiDiiminiBflfinDiEw 


o 

pKilLWiillffilll 
I  i!iiKii::iiLi,L;5fflililiia'ii!]F 


DEifflllffiDI 


loo 


'''^BSf 


EVOLUTIONS  or  THE  LINE.  191 

')ns  will  close  in  mass  on  that  which  precedes 

1884.  In  the  second  and  third  battalions,  the 
first  division  will  close  to  half  distance  on  the  one 
next  to  the  last  in  the  preceding  battalion  ;  the 
lieutenant-colonels  of  the  second  and  third  bat- 
talions will  each  throw  himself  in  advance  to  mark 
the  halting  point  for  his  first  division. 

1885.  The  last  division,  third  battalion,  will 
close  in  the  manner  indicated.  No.  819. 

1886.  The  music  of  each  battalion,  will  con- 
form themselves  to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  820. 

1887.  At  the  commencement  of  the  movement, 
the  major  of  the  first  battalion  will  place  himself 
abreast  with  its  first  division,  the  major  of  the  se- 
cond battalion  in  a  corresponding  position,  and  the 
major  of  the  third  abreast  with  its  last  division — 
all  on  the  right  flank  of  the  column.  The  column 
being  closed,  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  third 
battalion  will  place  himself  abreast  with  its  last 
division. 

1888.  If,  instead  of  closing  the  column  on  its 
headmost  division,  it  be  the  wish  of  the  General 
to  execute  the  movement  on  any  other,  say  the 
first  of  the  second  battalion,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  On  the  first  division ,  se- 
cond hattcdion,  to  half  distance  close  column.  3. 
March,  (or  double-quick — March.) 

1889.  The  first  and  second  commands  having 
been  repeated,  the  chief  of  the  last  division,  first 


192  EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE    LINE. 

battalion,  will  break  off  to  the  rear  three  files  from 
the  right  an^  three  from  the  left;  which  being 
done,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  battalion  to  face 
about. 

1890.  The  files  broken  to  the  rear,  will  face 
about  with  their  division.  The  lieutenant-colonel 
will  throw  himself  in  advance  at  company  dis- 
tance from  the  first  division,  second  battalion,  to 
mark  the  point  for  halting  the  last  division  but 
one  of  his  battalion. 

1891.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion 
will  close  ;  the  files  of  the  last  division  broken  off 
will  march  in  front  of  its  rear  rank,  now  leading; 
and  when  the  front  rank  of  this  division  has  pass- 
ed six  paces  beyond  the  lieutenant-colonel,  the 
chief  of  the  division  will  halt  it,  face  it  about, 
and  align  it  by  the  left. 

1892.  The  division  next  to  the  last  will  be 
halted  opposite  to  the  lieutenant-colonel.  The 
other  divisions  of  the  battalion  will  close  by  the 
means  indicated,  No.  2G9,  and  following. 

1893.  The  second  and  third  battalions  will  each 
execute  its  movements  as  prescribed.  No.  18.83, 
and  following. 

1894.  The  preparatory  column  being  formed  at 
half  distance,  the  General  can,  according  to  cir- 
cumstances, put  it  in  march,  or  cause  it  to  form 
square ;  if  the  latter,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Form   square. 

1895.  This  having  been  repeated  by  the  colo- 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    TUE    LINE.  193 

nels,  each  will  command  :  right  and  left,  into  line, 
wheel. 

.  1896.  At  this  command,  tliQ  lieutetant-colonel 
and  major,  first  battalion,  will  align  their  left  and 
right  guides  on  those  of  the  last  division,  third 
battalion,  who  to  this  end,  will  each  stand  fast, 
but  hold  his  piece  perpendicularly  between  the 
eyes,  the  butt  up. 

1897.  The  chief  of  the  headmost  division  of 
the  column  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast,  and  the 
chief  of  the  rearmost  division  will  command  :  1. 
fifth  (liiu'sion,  forward ;   2.    Guide  left. 

1898.  In  all  the  intermediate  divisions,  except 
those  in  reserve,  each  captain  will  throw  himself 
before  the  centre  of  his  company,  and  caution  it 
that  it  will  have  to  form  ^o  the  right  or  to  the  lejt, 
into  line. 

1899.  The  chiefs  of  the  two  divisions  in  re- 
serve will  each  command  :  1,  fifth  division,  for- 
ward;  2.  Guide  cnitre.  At  this  last  command, 
the  guides  on  the  flanks  will  retire  to  the  line  of 
file  closers. 

1900.  The  color-bearer,  pioneers,  and  music, 
will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed, 
Nos.  820-824. 

1901.  The  General  will  then  command  : 

3    March,  (or  double-quick — March. 

1902.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  square  will 
be  formed  ;  the  headmost  and  rearmost  divisions 
of  the  column  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is 

17 


194  EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE- 

prescribed  for  the  same  divisions  in  a  battalion 
square  ;  the  companies  of  the  remaining  divisions, 
except  of  tffose  in  reserve,  will  each  form  itself  to 
the  right  or  to  the  left,  into  line,  according  to  its 
position  on  the  right  or  left  flank  of  the  column. 
The  music  and  the  divisions  in  reserve,  will  ad- 
vance a  space  equal  to  the  front  of  a  company. 

1903.  As  soon  as  the  divisions  in  reserve  halt, 
their  chiefs  will  cause  their  platoons  to  double ; 
for  this  purpose,  each  chief  will  command :  1. 
On  the  centre,  double  platoons  ;  2.  March. 

1904.  At  the  first  command,  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon will  throw  himself  before  its  centre;  the 
chief  of  each  outer  platoon  will  cause  it  to  face 
inwards,  and  then  break  the  three  headmost  files 
to  the  rear. 

1905.  At  the  command  march,  these  outer  pla- 
toons will  double  on  the  interior  or  standing  pla- 
toons, and  place  themselves  in  the  rear,  at  three 
paces  from  the  latter  ]  their  chiefs  will  align  them 
on  the  centre,  and  the  files  which  had  been  broken 
to  the  rear,  will  return  into  line. 

1906.  The  square  being  formed,  the  General 
will  command : 

3.    Guides — Posts. 

1907.  At  this,  which  will  not  be  repeated,  the 
guides,  the  General  and  his  stafi:',  the  field  and 
staif  as  well  as  the  chiefs  of  divisions,  who  are 
without,  will  enter  the  square. 

1908.  The    captains  whose   companies    have 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE   LINE.  195 

formed  to  the  rvjht,  into  line,  will  remain  on^the 
left  of  their  companies.  Their  left  guides  will 
cover  them  in  the  rear  rank,  and  the  Covering  ser- 
geants will  take  post  as  file  closers  behind  the  right 
of  their  respective  companies. 

1909.  The  three  lieutenant-colonels  will  place 
themselves  behind  the  third  front;  the  one  of  the 
first  battalion,  near  the  angle  formed  by  the  first 
and  third  fronts ;  the  one  of  the  second  battalion, 
opposite  to  its  first  division,  and  the  other  near  the 
angle  formed  by  the  third  and  fourth  fronts.  The 
majors  will  place  themselves  behind  the  second 
front  opposite  to  these  positions  of  their  respec- 
tive lieutenant  colonels. 

1910.  The  second,  third,  first,  and  fourth  fronts 
of  the  square  will  be  commanded  by  the  field  of- 
ficers according  to  rank. 

1911.  If  the  column  be  at  a  half,  instead  of 
full  distance,  the  General  will,  before  forming 
square,  order  the  colonels  of  the  first  and  second 
battalions  each  to  close  his  last  division  in  mass,  on 
the  one  preceding  it;  which  being  executed,  the 
colonels  of  the  second  and  third  battalions  will 
march  them  forward,  and  each  halt  his  battalion 
when  its  first  division  is  at  company  distance  from 
the  last  division  but  one  of  the  preceding  battal- 
ion; the  chiefs  of  the  divisions  in  reserve,  will 
each,  on  putting  his  division  in  march,  in  order 
to  close,  cause  three  files  to  break  oif  to  the  rear 
from  the  right  and  left  of  the  division. 

1912.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  the  Ge- 


196  EVOLUTIONS   OF    THE    LINE. 

neral  will  cause  it  to  take  half  distance  on  any 
division  he  may  designate,  say  the  first  of  the  se- 
cond battalion  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  On  the.  first  division,  se- 
cond bat  fill  ion,  taJce  half  diatance.  3.  MarCH, 
(or  douhle-quick — Marcii.) 

1913.  The  column  will  take  distances  acc6rd- 
ing  to  the  principles  and  by  the  means  indicated, 
No,  1197;  and  following,  but  observing  what  fol- 
lows. 

1914-  Before  the  movement  begins,  the  Gene- 
ral will  send  two  officers  to  place  theD)selvcs  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  guides,  a  little  beyond  the 
points  at  which  the  headmost  and  rearmost  divi- 
sions of  the  column  will  arrive.  The  majors  of 
the  first  and  third  battalions,  placed  respectively 
by  the  side  of  their  leading  guides,  will  see  that 
eack  directs  himself  exactly  on  the  officer  in  his 
front. 

1915.  At  the  third  command,  the  lieufehant- 
colonel,  first  battalion,  will  throw  himself  to  com- 
pany distance  in  front  of  the  first  division, second 
battalion,  in  order  to  mark  the  halting  point  for 
the  last  division,  but  otie,  of  his  battalion.  The 
chief  of  its  last  division  will,  at  the  moment  of 
putting  the  column  in  march,  cause  the  three  files 
on  its  right,  and  the  three  on  the  left,  to  break  off 
to  the  rear  as  prescribed,  No.  1889,  and  \\v  will 
halt  his  division  the  instant  the  one  immediately 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  197 

preceding  shall  arrive  opposite  to  the  lieutenant- 
colonel. 

1916.  The  colonel  of  the  second,  whose  battal- 
ion takes  its  distances  to  the  rear,  having  repeat- 
ed the  first  and  second  commands,  the  chief  of  its 
last  division  will  immediately  cause  files  to  be 
broken  off  as  above ;  which  being  done,  the  co- 
lonel will  cause  the  battalion  to  face  about. 

1917.  The  files  of  its  last  division,  broken  to 
the  rear,  will  face  about  with  the  battalion,  and 
whilst  taking  distance,  they  will  march  in  front  of 
the  rear  rank  ;  the  chief  of  this  division  will  re- 
gulate himself  by  the  division  next  in  his  rear, 
and  command  Halt  at  the  moment  the  latter 
halts. 

1918.  In  the  third  battalion,  the  lieutenant-co- 
lonel, will,  in  advance,  throw  himself  to  company 
distance  behind  the  guide  of  the  last  division  but 
one  of  the  second  battalion,  in  order  to  mark  the 
halting  point  for  the  first  division  of  his  battalion. 

1919.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  General,  instead 
of  forming  square,  merely  to  dispose  the  column 
for  the  execution  of  this  movement,  in  case  of 
need,  he  will,  on  this  supposition,  cause  distances 
to  be  taken  by  the  head  of  the  column;  to  this 
end,  he  will  command  : 

1.   To  form  sqicare.     2.  By  the  head  of  column^ 
take  half  distance. 

1920.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed,  No.   1172,  and  following;  butthedivi- 


J98 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE   LINE. 


sions  to  be  held  in  reserve,  and  the  one,  respec- 
tively, next  in  their  rear,  will  observe  what  fol- 
lows. 

1921.  At  the  first  command,  each  chief  of  a 
reserve  division  will  cause  files  to  be  broken  off 
as  above;  he  will  then  give  the  cautionary  com- 
mands in  time  to  enable  his  division  to  march  at 
the  same  instant  with  the  one  next  in  front. 

1922.  Each  chief  of  division  that  immediately 
follows  a  re^^erve  division  will  give  the  command 
march,  the  moment  his  division  has  company  dis- 
tance from  the  last,  but  one,  in  the  preceding  bat- 
talion. 

1923.  In  each  battalion,  the  music  will  place 
themselves  as  prescribed,  No.  820,  behind  the  in- 
ner platoons  of  the  second  division,  as  soon  as 
the  latter  has  taken  its  distance. 

1924.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  General 
will  cause  company  distance  to  be  taken,  and,  for 
this  purpose,  will  command  :  ^ 

1.    To  form  square.     2.  By  the  head  of  colum 
take  half  distance.     3.  MARCH,    (or  douhle- 
qxdch — March.) 

1925.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed for  taking  distance  hy  the  head  of  column 
while  marching,  with  the  following  modifications, 
at  the  command  ybrwi  square,  the  dispositions  in- 
dicated No.  819,  will  be  executed.  If  it  be 
tended  merely  to  dispose  the  column  for  square^ 
the  General  will  not  halt  it  until  the  last  div 
has  its  distance. 


EVOLUTIONS  OP    THE    LINE.  199 

1926.  In  a  column  left  in  front,  those  several 
movements  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means/ except 
that  the  same  divisions  will  be  held  in  reserve,  as 
in  a  Column  right  in  front. 

1927.  The  column  being  formed  into  square, 
if  the  General  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a 
distance  less  than  thirty  paces,  he  will  command : 

1.  By   (such.)  froyit,  /oricard.     2.  MARCH.— r  , 
(or  douhle-quick — March.) 

1928.  The  movement  will  be  executed  as  in- 
dicated No.  854  and  following. 

1929.  The  square  will  be  halted  as  indicated 
No.  860  and  following.  In  moving  the  square 
forward  by  the  other  fronts,  the  same  rules  will 
be  observed. 

1930.  The  column  being  formed  into  square, 
when  the  General  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  ad- 
vance, he  will  command: 

1.  Form  column.     2.  March,  (or  douhle-quich — 
March.) 

1931. This  movement  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  864,  and  following,  but  observing 
what  follows. 

1932.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  each 
division  in  reserve  will  command :  form  dwision. 

1933.  At  this,  the  chief  of  each  outer  platoon, 
now  in  the  rear  of  a  centre  platoon,  will  give  the 
commands  and  make  the  preparatory  movement, 


200  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

for  deploying  on  the  corresponding  centre  pla- 
toon, and  at  the  command  march,  briskly  repeat- 
ed by  the  colonel  and  the  chief  of  the  reserve 
division,    the  movement  will  be  executed.  \ 

1934.  The  division  being  re-formed,  the  chiefs 
of  the  outer  platoons  will  retake  their  places  in 
column,  and  the  chief  of  the  division  will  again 
break  off  three  files  from  each  of  its  flanks. 

1935.  If,  before  the  formation  of  the  square, 
the  left  of  the  column  had  been  in  front,  the  co- 
lumn would  be  re-formed  by  the  same  commands 
and  according  to  the  same  principles. 

1936.  For  marching  in  retreat,  the  Ge  ;eral  will 
form  the  column  by  the  commands  and  means  just 
indicated. 

1937.  The  column  being  formed,  the  General 
"will  cause  it  to  face  by  the  rear  rank  by  the  com- 
mands and  means  indicated.  No.  872,  and  follow- 
ing; the  headmost  and  rearmost  divisions  will  ex- 
ecute, in  this  case,  what  is  prescribed  for  the  first 
and  fourth  divisions  in  a  battalion  square. 

1938.  The  chiefs  of  the  reserve  divisions,  be- 
fore causing  them  to  face  about,  will  cause  their 
broken  files  to  return  into  line;  each  chief  will 
then  close  his  division  in  mass  on  the  one  next  in 
front;  which  being  executed,  he  will  again  cause 
the  same  files  to  break  off^  to  the  rear. 

1939.  The  column,  thus  disposed,  will  march 
and  form  squares  as  if  it  faced  by  the  front  rank, 
or  it  maybe  faced  by  tlie  front  rank  and  marched 
in  advance  by  the  commands  and  means  indicated, 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE 


J  J..,. a 


'PI    '/I 


AW 


I  \ 

I    4B^ 


3B 


iiir 


I\gJ 


i  §.i 


I  ii! 


__       v^  _%^^ 


{^'■^  5 


.5B'^' 


^^ 


.C 


TT 


"F^?,  7 


'•iwiiiBiiiffisiaiiaj- 


^%   ^1%    g%   ;::^ 


llMiilgElHi!!? 


200  EVOLUTIONS    OF    THB    LINE. 

for   denlovinnf  —    ^' 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  201 

Nos.  877-8.  If  it  form  square,  whilst  fnced  by 
the  rear  rank,  each  chief  of  a  reserve  division  will 
cause  its  outer  platoons  to  double  as  prescribed, 
No.  190o,  and  following. 

1940.  The  square  beinir  fonncd  by  the  rear 
rank,  the  column,  for  inarching,  will  be  re  formed 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed.  No.  876. 
Each  chief  of  a  reserve  division  will  cause  it  to 
re-form  as  indicated,.  No.  1932,  and  following. 

To  reduce  the  square. 

1942.  A  square,  of  several  battalions,  will  be 
reduced  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed. 
No.  88o,  and  following. 

Squares  in  four  ranks. 

1943.  If  the  square  formed  in  two  ranks,  ac- 
cording to  the  preceding  rules,  should  not  be 
deemed  sufficiently  strong,  the  General  may  cause 
it  to  be  formed  into  four  ranks  (and  the  reverse) 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed,  No.  910, 
and  following,  School  of  the  BattoUon. 

KemarJcs  on  the  formation  of  squares. 

1944.  A  column  disposed  for  the  forma- 
tion of  the  square,  being  in  march,  when  the 
General  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  be  covered  by 
skirmishers,  he  will  cause  one  or  more  companies 
of  the  reserve  to  be  thrown  out  for  the  purpose : 


202  sYOLnioNS  of  the  link. 

these  skirmishers  will  never  pass  beyond  the  dis- 
tance of  fifty  paces  from  the  square. 

1945.  The  G-eneral,  wishing  to  form  square,, 
will  halt  the  column  and  cause  to  the  colw 
to  be  sounded  for  the  re-entrance  of  the  skir- 
mishers. 

1946.  The  reserve  divisions  being  intended  not 
only  to  furnish  skirmishers  for  covering  the  co- 
lumn, but  also  to  sustain  the  parts  of  the  square 
which  may  be  the  most  hotly  attacked,  no  fixed 
place  can  be  assigned  to  those  divisions  in  a  square ; 
but,  when  in  column,  each  will  take  the  place 
which  has  been  indicated. 

1947.  When  a  column,  closed  in  mass,  has  to 
form  square,  it  will  begin  by  taking  company  dis- 
tance ;  but  if  so  suddenly  threatened  by  cavalry 
as  not  to  allow  time  for  this  disposition,  it  will  be 
formed  in  the  following  manner. 

1948.  The  General  will  command : 

1,   Column  against  cavalry.  2.  March,  (or  dou- 
hle-guick — MARCH.)    .  '  i 

1949.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  guides 
will  pass  into  the  lines  of  file  closers;  the 
chief  of  the  headmost  division  will  caution  it  to 
stand  fast,  and  pass  behind  the  rear  rank;  the  chief 
of  the  rearmost  division  will  cause  it  to  face  about, 
and  its  file  closers  will  pass  at  the  same  time  be- 
hind the  front  rank,  become  the  rear;  the  outer 
file  of  each  of  these  divisions  will  then  face  out- 
wards. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE.  203 

1950.  In  the  intermediate  divisions,  each  cap- 
tain will  see  as  many  files,  from  the  outer  flank  of 
his  company,  into  line  of  battle,  as  will  close  up 
the  distance  in  front  of  its  outer  flank.  The  cap- 
tains in  the  division  next  to  that  in  the  rear,  will 
also  close  up,  in  like  manner,  the  distance  between 
tlieir  outer  flanks  and  the  rearmost  division.  The 
tiles  of  each  company,  remaining  in  column,  will 
close  on  their  outer  files,  formed  into  line  of  bat- 
tle, in  order  to  create  a  vacant  space  in  the  middle 
of  the  column. 

To  form  square  Jrom  line  of  hattle, 

1951.  The  three  battalions  being  deployed,  they 
will  form  square  by  the  means  indicated,  Scliool  of 
the  Battalion. 

1952.  If  it  be  intended  that  the  direction  of  the 
square  shall  be  parallel  to  the  line  of  battle,  the 
General  will  cause  the  line  to  break  to  the  rear 
into  column  by  division,  with  the  right  or  left  in 
front,  and  then  close  the  column  to  company  dis- 
tance, on  any  division  he  may  prefer,  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed,  No.  1125,  and  following, 
and  No.  1881,  and  following. 

1953.  The  intention  being  that  the  square  shall 
be  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle,  the  General 
will  cause  the  line  to  ploy  into  column  by  division 
at  company  distance,  but  in  preference  on  the  right 
or  left  division  of  a  battalion ;  to  this  end,  he  will 
command : 


204  EYOLUTIONS    OF    THE    LINE. 

1.    To  form  square.  2.    Column  at  half  distance 
h^  <Jivmoii.  o.    On  the  Ji rat  (or  Ji/th)  lUvisiOH 
(such)    battaUoUyrir/lit    {ox  left)  in  front.     4.      " 
March,  (or  douhlt-qulek—^lAKGE..') 

1954.  This  movement  will  be  executed  accord-     1 
ing  to  the  principles  prescribed,  (we  N^o.  159,)  for     * 
plo}ing  a  line  into  coluHin  b}'  division  at  company 
distance,  but  observing  what  follows. 

1955.  The  chief  of  each  reserve  division  will 
cause  it  to  take  its  place  in  the  column,  so  that 
there  may  be  only  three  paces  between  it  and  the 
division  next  in  front;  and  as  soon  as  his  division 
has  been  halted  and  aligned,  he  will  break  off  to 
the  rear,  the  three  files  from  each  flank. 

195G.  The  chief  of  each  division  that  enters 
the  column  next  after  a  reserve  division,  will  cause 
it  to  take  company  distance  from  the  division  next 
in  front  of  the  reserve  division. 

1957.  These  several  movements  may  be  exe- 
cuted while  the  line  is  in  march  by  the  principles 
prescribed,   School  of  the  Battalion. 

1958.  The  preceding  examples  have  been  given 
to  serve  for  a  line  of  three  or  two  battalions;  but 
if  the  line  be  composed  of  a  sufficient  number  pf 
battalions  to  be  divided  into  many  squares,  the  lat- 
ter will  be  disposed  by  cchellons.  1  he  perpendic- 
ular distance  between  the  cchellons  will  be  such 
that,  the  squares  being  formed,  the  first  front  of 
the  second  may  find  itself  at  least  fifty  paces  farther 
to  the  rear  than  the  fourth  front  of  the  fir.-.t  echel- 


EY0LUTI0N3  OF   TUE   LINE.  205 

Ion.  This  rule  is  equally  applicable  to  a  column 
to  be  formed  into  several  squares. 

1959.  When  the  echellons  have  to  march  in 
advance  or  retreat,  they  will  be  formed  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed,  No.  1806,  and  follow- 
ing, whether  the  battalions,  which  are  to  compose 
the  echellons,  be  already  disposed  for  the  forxa- 
tion  of  squares,  or  be  yet  deployed.  If  the  echel- 
lons are  to  remain  at  a  halt,  they  will  be  formed 
on  the  centre,  or  on  one  of  the  wings,  as  will  be 
explained. 

19G0.  It  is  supposed  that  the  General-in-chief 
wishes  to  form  the  echellons  on  the  centre  :  he 
will  command : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Echellon  hy  hattalion  (or 
hrigade)  at  (so  many)  paces,  o.  On  (such) 
hattalion  (or  hrigade)  right  (or  left)  icing  in 
Jrontj  Jorm  echellons.  4.  March,  (or  douhle- 
qidck — March.) 

1961.  At  the  command  march,  the  portion  of 
the  line  which  is  to  form  the  directing  echellon 
will  stand  fast. 

1962.  All  the  other  echellons  will  put  them- 
selves in  march  at  the  same  time,  each  taking  its 
direction  from  the  side  of  the  directing  echellon; 
and  whether  it  march  to  the  front  or  the  rear,  it 
will  be  halted  by  its  commander  when  it  has  taken 
the  given  number  of  paces  from  the  next  echellon 
on  the  side  of  the  direction. 

1963.  At  the  commencement  of  the  movement 
18 


206  EYOLUTIONS    CP    THE    LINK. 

the  directing  echellon  will  form  square;  the  com- 
mander of  each  of  the  other  echellons,  after  halt- 
ing it,  will  rectify  the  alignment  so  that  it  may  be 
parallel  to  the  directing  echellon,  and  then  cause 
it  to  form  square. 

1964.  A  column  which  has  to  be  divided  into 
several  squares  will  be  thrown  into  echellons  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles;  the  portion  which 
is  to  constitute  the  directing  echellon  will  stand 
fast,  and  the  others  will  march  to  the  right  or  left, 
to  the  distance  fixed  by  the  Greneral-in-ehief,  either 
by  the  flank,  or  by  breaking  from  the  general  co- 
lumn by  a  wheel. 

Oblique  squares. 

1965.  A  line  threatened  by  cavalry,  and  with- 
out time  to  form  squares  disposed  in  echellons,  will 
be  formed  into  oblique  squares  by  battalion  in  the 
following  manner : 

The  General-in-chief  will  command : 

1.    Ohlique  squares  hy  hattalion.     2.    On  the  first 
division,  form  square. 

196G.  At  the  second  command  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  of  each  battalion  will  trace  the  alignment 
of  the  first  division  in  the  following  manner:  he 
will  place  himself  before  and  near  the  right  file  of 
this  division,  face  to  the  left,  march  twelve  paces 
along  the  front  rank,  halt,  face  to  his  right,  march 
twelve  paces  perpendicularly  to  the   front,  halt 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   THE    LINK.  207 

again  and  immediately  place  a  marker  at  this 
point.  The  covering  sergeant  of  the  right  com- 
pany will  step  at  the  same  time,  before  its  right 
file,  half  face  to  the  right,  and  conform  the  line  of 
his  shoulders  to  that  of  the  shoulders  of  the  mark- 
er placed  by  the  lieutenant-colonel.  These  mark- 
ers being  established,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will 
place  a  third  at  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  di- 
vision will  halt. 

1967.  The  chief  of  the  first  division  will  imme- 
diately establish  it  by  a  wheel  to  the  right  on  a 
fixed  pivot,  against  the  markers,  and  align  it  by 
the  left. 

1968.  Pending  the  execution  of  those  disposi- 
tions, the  colonel  will  give  the  commands,  and 
make  the  preparatory  movements  for  ploying  his 
battalion  into  column  at  company  distance  in  rear 
of  the  first  division ;  and  as  soon  as  this  division 
is  in  the  new  direction,  he  will  cause  the  move- 
ment to  commence,  which  will  be  executed  in  the 
manner  indicated,  No.  889  and  No.  893,  but  ob- 
serving what  follows. 

1969.  The  chief  of  the  second  division,  instead 
of  breaking  the  headmost  files  to  the  rear,  will 
break  them  to  the  front,  and  at  the  command 
march  he  will  conduct  his  division  towards  the 
point  of  entrance  into  the  column.  Arrived  at 
this  point,  he  will  halt  in  his  own  person,  cause 
his  division  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  right,  instructs 
ing  the  right  guide  to  direct  himself  parallelly  to 
the  first  division;  and  as  soon  as  the  left  file  has 


208  KYOLUTIONS   OF  THE   LINK. 

passed,  its  chief  will  halt  the  division,  and  align  it 
by  the  left.  The  other  divisions  will  break  to  the 
rear,  but  slightly;  each  will  enter  the  column  as 
prescribed  for  the  second,  and  the  moment  the 
battalion  is  ployed  into  column,  the  colonel  will 
cause  it  to  form  square. 

1970.  The  formation  of  battalions  into  oblique 
square?,  on  the  left  division  of  each,  will  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  in- 
verse means. 

1971.  In  the  preceding  example  the  line  was 
supposed  to  be  deployed ;  but  if  it  be  formed  of 
battalions  already  in  columns,  the  desired  obliquity 
will  be  established  by  causing  each  battalion  to 
change  direction  by  the  flank;  to  this  end,  the 
General-in-chief  will  command : 

1.    To   form    oblique   squares    hy    battalion.     2- 
Change  direction  by  the  righi  (or  left)  flank. 

1972.  At  the  second  command,  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel of  each  battalion  will  trace  the 
new  direction  in  the  following  manner:  he  will  '" 
place  before  the  right  and  left  files,  of  the  head-  J 
most  division,  two  markers  and  a  third  on  the  pro-  \ 
mulgation  of  the  first  two,  on  the  side  of  the  change 
of  direction,  and  at  twelve  paces  from  the  flank  of 
the  column.  He  will  then  place  himself  before 
the  third  marker,  and  take  twelve  steps  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  front,  halt  and  finish  the  tracee  of 


EVOLUTIONS    or  THB   LINl.  209 

the  new  direction  in  the  manner  indicated,  No. 
1966.  Pending  this  operation,  each  colonel  will 
give  the  commands,  and  make  the  preparatory  dis- 
positions for  a  change  of  direction  by  the  flank, 
and  cause  it  to  be  executed  as  soon  as  the  new  di- 
rection is  traced.  The  change  of  direction  having 
been  executed,  he  will  cause  the  square  to  be 
formed. 

1973.  A  column  at  full  distance  maybe  formed 
into  oblique  squares  by  the  same  means :  each  bat- 
tajion  will  be  closed  to  half  distance  on  its  head- 
most subdivision;  which  being  executed,  the  bat- 
talion will  change  direction^,  as  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed, and  then  form  square. 

To  reform  the  line. 

1974.  The  line  being  disposed  in  oblique 
squares,  when  the  General-in-chief  shall  wish 
to  re-form  it,  he  will  cause  the  squares  to  break  5 
to  this  end  he  will  command : 

1.  Reduce  squares. 

1975.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  each  colonel 
will  cause  his  square  to  break.  Pending  the  ex- 
ecution of  the  movement,  the  General-in-chief 
will  throw  himself  fifty  or  sixty  paces  in  front  of 
the  square  he  may  judge  the  most  conveniently 
placed  to  become  the  directing  battalion,  say  the 
third )  he  will  place  two  markers  (a  little  less  than 


210  EVOLUTIONS  or   THE   LINH. 

division  distance)  in  the  direction  he  may  wish  to 
give  to  the  line,  and  as  soon  as  they  are  establish- 
ed, he  will  command: 

1.     The   thirdj   the   battalion   of  direction.      2. 
Guides — On  the  Line. 

1976.  These  commands  having  been  repeated, 
the  lieutenant-colonel  of  each  battalion  will  detach 
himself  with  two  markers,  whom  he  will  establish 
on  the  prolongation  of  those  placed  by  the  Gene- 
ral-in-chief,  preserving  its  interval  of  twenty-two 
paces  on  the  side  of  tlie  directing  battalion. 

1977.  As  soon  as  the  markers  are  established 
before  the  front  of  a  battalion,  its  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 1.  Column,  Jorward ;  2.  Guide  riylit;  3. 
Head  of  column  to  the  left;  4.  March,  (or  dou- 
hie-quick — March.) 

1978.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion 
will  put  itself  in  movement;  the  first  division  will 
wheel  to  the  left,  and  direct  itself  so  as  to  arrive 
parallelly  to  the  line  of  battle;  when  at  three 
paces  from  this  line,  the  colonel  will  halt  the  bat- 
talion, and  if  any  division  be  not  yet  in  the  new 
direction,  it  will  be  promptly  brought  into  it.  The 
battalion  being  halted,  the  colonel  will  align  it  by 
flank  next  to  the  directing  battalion. 

Remark  on   Ohlique  Squares, 

1979.  The   formation   of  a   line  into  oblique 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THK   LINE.  211 

squares,  gives  the  facility  of  placing  it,  whatever 
be  its  extent,  as  promptly  in  safety  against  the  at- 
tack of  cavalry,  as  if  it  were  a  single  battalion, 
without  causing  the  line  to  quit  the  position  it  oc- 
cupies, and  then,  after  re-forming  each  square 
into  column,  the  line  may  be  marched  in  any  di- 
rection. The  fires  of  oblique  squares  also  cross 
each  other  in  every  direction,  except  that  of  the 
squares  themselves,  and  this  even  when  the  bat- 
talions, before  being  formed  into  squares,  happen- 
ed not  to  be  on  the  same  alignment 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS, 


TITLE  V. 
Evolutions  of  the  Line. 

Note. — The  references  are  to  paragraphs. 

General  principles  and  division  of  the  evolu- 
tions of  the  line, 99u 

Post  of  the  General-in-chief,  of  the  major-gene- 
rals and  brigadier-generals,  in  line  and  in 
column, .^ « 994 

General  rules  for  commands, . .  .* 1000 

PART  FIRST. 

Art.  1.   To  open  ranks, .  1009 

To  close  ranks,    _-.  , .  .  10]  2 

Art.  2.   Manual  of  arms, - 1013 

Art.  3.   Loading  at  will,  and  the  firings, 1014 

To  rest, 1031 

PART  SECOND. 

Art.  1.  To   break   to  the  front  to   the  right  or 

left  into  column, ...      1040 


n  CONTENTS. 

To  break  to  the  front   to  the  right  to 

march  to  the  left,  and  the  reverse,.  .      1044 
Art.  2.   To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left 

into  column, 1048,  56,  61 

Art.  3.   To  ploy  the  line  into  close  column  ox 
mass : 

General  rule, 1074 

In  rear  of  the  directing  battalion,. . ..  1068-79 
In  front  of  the  directing  battalion,. . .  1075-7& 
On  an  interior  battalion,  , 1081 

PART  THIRD. 

Art.  1.    To  march  in  column  at  full  distance.. .      1090 
The  column  arriving  in  front,  or  in  rear 
the  line  of  battle,  to  prolong  it  on  that 

lirie, ^.,      1097 

Art.  2.   Column  in  route, 1101 

Art.  3.   To  change  direction  in  column  at  full 

distance, HOG 

Art.  4.    To  halt  the  coluMin, 1109 

Art.  5.   To  close  the  column  to  half  distance  or 
in  mass  : 

1st,  On  the  leading  company, 1 125 

2d,  On  the  rearmost  company, 1 134 

3d,  On  an  interior  battalion, 1143 

Art.  6.   To   march  in  column  at  half  distance, 

or  closed  in  mass, r^  ....      1140 

Art.  7.    To  change  direction  in   cohimn  at  half 

distance, 1154 


CONTENTS.  Ill 

Art.  8.   To  change  direction  in  column  closed 
in  mass : 

1st,  In  marching, 1154 

2d,  From  a  halt, 1164 

Art.  9.    Being  in  column    at   half  distance,  or 
closed  in  mass,  to  take  distance : 

1st,  By  the  head  of  the  column, 1171 

2d,  On  the  rear  of  the  column, 1174 

3d,  On  the  head  of  the  column, 1185 

4th,  On  an  interior  battalion, 1 190 

Art  10.  Countermarch, 1205 

Art  11.  Being  in  column  by  company,  and  at  a 

hah,  to  form  division, 1214 

PART  FOURTH. 

Alt.  1.   Manner    of    determining    the    line    of 

battle, 1224 

Art,  2.    Different  modes  of  passing  from  column 
at  full  distance  into  line  of  battle  : 

1st.  To  the  left  or  right, 1225 

By  inversion  to  the  right  or  left, 1235 

(Successive  formations  :) 

2d.  The  right  or  left, 124C 

(General  rule,) 1260 

3d,  Forward, 1261 

4tli,  Faced  to  the  rear, 1279 

Art.  3.    Formation  into  line  of  battle  composed 
of  two  movements  : 
1st,  To  the  left  or  right,  and  forward,. .     1297 


IV  CONTENTS. 

2d,  To  the  left  or  right,  and  faced  to  the 

rear, 1307 

3d,  Forward  on  an  interior  battalion,.  .      1306 
4tli,  Faced  to  the   rear  on  an    interior 

battalion, 1322 

Art.  4.    Different  modes  of  passing  from  column 
at  half  distance,  into  line  of  battle  : 

Ist,  To  the  left  or  right, 1330 

2d,  On  the  right  or  left, 1334 

3d,  Forward, 1335 

4th,  Faced  to  the  rear, 1336 

Art,  5.   Columns   closed  in  mass — Deployment 
by  battalion  in  mass  : 

1st,  Faced  to  the  front, 133S 

On  the  headmost  battalions, 1340 

On  the  rearmost  battalion, 1360 

On  an  interior  battalion,. 1377 

2d,  Faced  to  the  rear, 1379 

3d,  Faced  to  the  left, 1400 

4th,  Faced  to  the  right, 1413 

Same  movement  by  inrersion, 1415 

Deployment  of  masses, 1422 

Deployment  of  a  column  without  the 
intermediate  deployment  by  battal- 

.  ion  in  mass, 1444 

Movements  which  may  be  executed  by 
a  line  of  battalions  in  masses : 

1st,  The  advance  in  line, 1463 

2d,  To  halt   the    line   marching  in  ad- 
vance, and  to  align  it,. .    ...........      1475 


CONTKNTS.  ▼ 

3d,  The   line    marching    in  advance  to 

cause  it  to  change  direction, 1480 

4th,  To  march  in  retreat, l49o 

6th,  To  ehanjje    direction   of   the    line 

marching  in  retreat, ..      150:! 

6th,  To  break  the  line  formed  by  bat- 
talion in  mass,  and  to  reform  the 
column  into  line, 1509 

7th,  To  ploy  the  line  nf  masses  into 
general  colutnn  closed  in  masses — 
Remarks  on  inversions, 1550 

PART  FIFTH. 
Art.  1.    To  advance  in    line  of  battle  deployed,     1534 

Art.  2.    To  halt  the  line,   and    to  align  it, \5^2 

An.  3.    Change  of  direction  marching  in  line  of 

battle, 157:^ 

Art.  4.    To  retreat  in  line  of  battle, 1589 

An.  5.   To  halt  the   line    marching  in  re'reat, 

and  to  align  it, 1595 

Art.  6.    Change  of  direction  in  marching  in  re- 
treat,       1600 

Art.  7.    March  in  line  of  battle  of  a  line  of  bat- 
talions in  columns, .      1608 

1st,  To  cause  the  line  of  columns  to  ad- 
vance,        1615 

2(1,  To  halt  the  line  of  columns,  and  to 

deploy  it, 1639 

3d,  The  line  of  columns  in  advance,  to 

cause  it  to  change  direction, 1646 


▼»  CONTEKiTS. 

4th,  To   cause  the   line  of  (torumns  to 

march  in  retreat 1654 

5th,  To  hall  the  line  of  cnlamnis  march- 
ing in  rfetreat,  awd  to  8lijii>  it,. .    ^..  .      165S 
6tli,  The   line   of  eohifnns   marehrnii  in 
retreaty  to   cause  it   to   chaBiie  dfrec- 

tion, 1661 

Art.  8.    To  pass  a  defile  in  front,  .  .  ,  .• 1665 

■    To  re-form  the   line  after  passing-  the 

-''      defile,.    1677 

Art.  9.    To  pass  a  defile  in  retreat,     169f 

To  re-forra  the  line  after  passinj,'  the  de- 
file,         1697 

Second  example  of  the  sarnem'Otement,     1700 

Art.  10.  Changes  of  front:  .„      . 

Movements  of  the  first  lin.e  : 

l&t,  Forward  on  the  right  hattalion,. .  ./      1707 

Forward  on  the  left  battalion,  .  .  ..      1717 

2d,  To  the  leai  on  the  right  battalion,.  .      1718 

To  the  re«r  on  the  kft  battalion,  ..      1'725 

3d,  Central  changes  of  fronts    1726 

Oblique  changes  of  front, 1733 

Changes  of  front  of  two  lines  : 
1st,   Perpendicularly    forward    on    the 

right  of  the  first  line 1739 

Perpendicularly  forward  on  the  left 

of  the  first  line,. 175D 

2d,  Perpendicularly  to   the   rear  on  the 

right  of  the  first  liue,,.,...« ^51 


COBTTINTS.  Til 

PerpeniHcularly   to  the    rear  on  the 

left  of  the  first  line, 17G0 

3(1,  Perpendicularly  on  the  fifth  battal- 
ion of  the  first  line,  the  left  or  right 

wing  thrown  forward, 1761,1766 

Ot>lique  changes  of  front : 
J  St,  Forward   on  the  right  of  the   first 

line, 1771 

2d.  Forward  on  the  left  of  the  fir&t  line,  1780 
3d,  To  the  rear  on   the  right  of  the  first 

line, 1781 

To    the   rear  on  the  left  of  the  first 

line, 17S6 

On   the   fifth    or   fourth  b-attalion,  the 
left  or  right  wing  thrown  forward, 

1787, 1792 

Art.  II.  Order  in  echelion, 1805 

Direct  echellons  in  advancing,. ...  .  —  1806 

To  re-form  the  line, 1812 

Direct  echellons  in  retreat, 1820 

To  re-form  the  )ine, 1 825 

Oblique  echellons, 1829 

Formation  of  obliqae  echellons,    1832 

To  put  the  echellons  in  march, 1836 

To  re-form  the  line, 1837 

Art.  12.  To  retreat  by  alternate  battalions^  ....  1844 

To  re-form  the  line, ,....  185^ 

Art.  13.  Passage  of  lines: 

In  retreating, 1860 

In  advancing, , ,, , ,.    , »  1869 


VI J I  CONTENTS. 

Art.  14.  Dispositions  apainst  cavalry, 1879 

Being  in  column  by  company  at  full  dis- 
tance, to  form  squares, 1881 

Being  in    column   at    half  distance,   to 

form  squares, 1911 

Beinj;  in   column   by  division,  closed  in 

mass,  to  form  squares, 1912 

Tf»  move  the  square  in  advance  by  one 

of  its  fronts, 1927 

To  form   the   square  into  column  in  or- 
der to  march  or  retreat, 1930,  1936 

To  reduce  the  square, 1942 

Squares  in  four  ranks, 1943 

Prom|)t  formation  of  the  square  from  a 

column  cosed  in  mass, 1947 

To  form  square  from  line  of  battle  par- 

allelly  to  the  line, 1952 

Perpendicularly  to  the  line, 1953 

Squares  disposed  in  echellona, 1958 

Oblique  squares, I96r» 

To  form  a  line  of  battalions  in  columns 

into  oblique  squares,  .. . 1971 

To  form  a  column  at  full  distance  into 

oblic]ue  squares, 1973 

To  reduce  squares,  and   to  re-form  line.     1974 
Remarks  on  oblique  squares, 1979 


«Pte#^; 


>a;.  ^.■iS'i.l^ 


mm'^^ 


#i5K 


ii<fwm: 


m^m 


UM 


